礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
随注文
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Anudīpanīpāṭha
1. 心集随阐明
144 段
心摄注疏
1. Cittasaṅgahaanudīpanā
顶礼了知无量智、作世间与出世间光明的胜者之后;
我要为《胜义灯》写一部《随灯》。
Anantaññāṇaṃ natvāna, lokālokakaraṃ jinaṃ; Karissāmi paramattha-dīpaniyā nudīpaniṃ.
在这里,“世间光明者”是指在十千世界之中,用四圣谛的教法带来光明的人。“胜义灯”在这里有两层意思:主要含义和引申含义。其中,主要含义就叫胜义,也就是词句的根本义、直接义。某些引申含义,只要说得通,也可以算作胜义。“胜义灯”的意思就是阐明、开显胜义。那位论师在撰写这部《胜义灯》时,首先以“由升起……”等语句向佛陀世尊致敬。
[Tattha, lokālokakaranti dasasahassilokadhātuyaṃ catussaccadhammadesanālokakārakaṃ. Paramatthadīpanīti ettha attho duvidho padhānatthoca pariyāyatthoca. Tattha padhānattho paramatthonāma, padhānatthotica padavākyānaṃ mukhyattho ujukattho. Pariyāyatthopi koci, yuttarūpo attho paramattho yeva. Paramatthaṃdīpetipakāsetītiparamatthadīpanī]. Taṃpara matthadīpaniṃkarontoācariyo pathamaṃtāva buddhassabhagavato paṇāmaṃkaroti ‘‘udayāyassā’’tiādinā.
在这里,“升起”是指从生起而上升。“那位”是指那位一切知者佛陀大日轮。“独一”是指没有第二者、无与伦比者。“具足正法光芒之网”中,这里的“正法”指大师的教法。此处特指以八万四千法蕴所摄的教说正法。具有正法所成光芒之网,就是“具足正法光芒之网”。属于那位具足正法光芒之网者。“绽放”是指开放,达到四圣谛智的开显、智慧盛开。“众生莲花”是指众生所成的莲花。这里的“众生”指应受教化的有情,他们听闻一切知者之教说后,将觉悟四圣谛法。莲花即莲华。“于生处大池中”即在称为生处大池的众生莲花大池中。这里,“生处”名为十千轮围世界,被称为一佛刹。在那里,大菩萨们为成佛而在最初大誓愿等时,一时之间发生大地震动等。在那里,居住的天与梵天们成为佛陀的眷属。由于那位独一的具足正法光芒之网的大日轮之升起,于那生处大池中,众生莲花绽放。
Tattha ‘‘udayā’’ti udayatouggamanato. ‘‘Yassā’’ti yassa sabbaññubuddhamahāsūrassa. ‘‘Ekassā’’ti adutīyassa, asadi sassavā . ‘‘Saddhammaraṃsijālino’’ti etthasaddhammotisatthusā sanadhammovuccati. Tatthaca caturāsītisahassadhammakkhandhasaṅkhāto desanāsaddhammoidhādhippeto. Saddhammasaṅkhātaṃraṃsijālaṃassa atthīti saddhammaraṃsijālī. Tassasaddhammaraṃsijālino. ‘‘Pabujjhiṃsū’’ti vikasiṃsu, catussaccaññāṇavikāsaṃtaññāṇasamphullaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. ‘‘Janambujā’’ti janasaṅkhātāambujā. Tatthajanānāma idhabodhaneyyasattā adhippetā, yesabbaññudesanaṃ sutvā catussacca dhammaṃ bujjhissanti. Ambujātipadumā. ‘‘Jātikkhettemahāsareti’’ jātikkhetta saṅkhāte janambujamahāsare. Tattha jātikkhettaṃ nāmadasasahassa cakkavāḷaṃ, yaṃ ekaṃ buddhakkhettanti vuccati. Yattha ca mahābodhisattānaṃ buddhabhāvatthāya pathamamahābhinīhārakālādīsu ekappahārenapathavikampanādīnipavattanti. Yatthacavasantādevabrahmāno buddhaparisāhonti. Jātikkhettemahāsareyassa ekassa saddhammaraṃsijālino mahāsūrassa udayā tasmiṃ jātikkhette mahāsare janambujāpabujjhiṃsūtiyojanā.
所谓“大日轮”,是指一切知佛陀那如大日轮般的日轮。它驱除、除去在众生莲花相续中生起的大黑暗——放出正法光芒之网,使其消失,所以叫“大黑暗驱除者”。即“那位大黑暗驱除者”。
‘‘Taṃ mahāsūra’’nti sabbaññubuddhamahāsūriyamaṇḍalaṃ. Janambuja santānesupavattaṃ mahantaṃ mohatamaṃnūdati apaneti, saddhammaraṃsijālaṃ vissajjanto antaradhāpetīti mahāmohatamonudo. Taṃ ‘‘mahāmohatamonudaṃ’’.
这样礼敬佛陀之后,为了把自己心中想要达成的礼敬目的作回向,说出了“所生”等话。这里的连接是:“大日轮啊,请驱散我心中所生的那团黑暗。”其中,“所生”意思是很好地生起,也就是在无始轮回中坚固地持续存在。“黑暗聚”指大痴的黑暗聚,或者指一切烦恼的黑暗聚。造成障碍、压迫和损害的业也都包括在这黑暗聚里。同样,疾病等障碍法也属于黑暗一类,就像“黑暗趣向黑暗”等经文里所说的那样。“请驱散”就是让它散去、除去、消失。
Evaṃ buddhassapaṇāmaṃ katvā attanā icchitaṃ paṇāmappayojanaṃ pariṇāmento ‘‘sañjāta’’ntiādimāha. ‘‘Somahāsūromayhaṃ hadaye sañjātaṃ tamokhandhaṃ panūdata’’ntiyojanā. Tattha ‘‘sañjāta’’nti suṭṭhujātaṃ, anamataggesaṃsāre daḷhaṃ pavattanti attho. ‘‘Tamokhandha’’nti mahāmohatamokhandhaṃ. Sabbakilesatamokhandhaṃ vā. Antarāyakarāni upavīḷakopaghātakakammānipi tamokhandhe saṅgahitāni eva. Tathā rogādayo antarāya dhammāpi tamojātikāevatamotamaparāyanotiādīsu. ‘‘Panūdata’’nti panūdatu, apanetu, antaradhāpetu.
这样以利益为目标完成礼敬之后,现在要说明有根据的著作承诺,所以说“由古德……”等话。其中,“根据”指的是著作承诺的直接原因。那是什么呢?就是求义者的请求,以及所摄义理的广博。
Evaṃ sappayojanaṃ paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni sanidānaṃ ganthappaṭiññaṃ karonto ‘‘porāṇakehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha nidānaṃ nāma ganthappaṭiññāya āsannakāraṇaṃ. Katadhaṃpanatanti, sāratthābhimānīnaṃ yācanañcasaṅgahassavipulatthatā ca.
其中,用两首偈颂说明有正当理由的请求;再用两首偈颂,以譬喻显示其义理的广大。从“因此”等语开始,则以著作的体裁和著作的功德,连同显示对著作的承诺。在这里,第一首偈颂的句义应这样连接:“在《阿毗达摩义摄》中,古时智者所诠说的许多注释,在此世间都能见到。”所谓“注释”,指的是古复注。既然如此,为什么还要请求新的注释呢?句义应这样连接:“那些自认追求真义的人,并不因那许多古注释而感到满足。因此他们才请求它。”由此也说明,那些古注释确实少有精义。其中,“满足”就是满意;“不得”就是得不到;“ye”就是指那些人。
Tattha dvīhi gāthāhi sakāraṇaṃ yācanaṃ dasseti. Puna dvīhi gāthāhi saupamaṃvipulatthataṃdasseti. ‘‘Tasmā’’tiādinā ganthappakāra ganthaguṇehi sahaganthappaṭiññaṃ dasseti. Tattha ādigāthāyaṃ ‘‘abhidhammatthasaṅgahe porāṇakehi viññūhi vaṇṇitā bahūvaṇṇanā idhalokamhidissantī’’ti yojanā. ‘‘Vaṇṇanā’’ti porāṇaṭīkāyo vuccanti. Evañcasati kasmā abhinavaṃ vaṇṇanaṃ yācantīti. ‘‘Ye sāratthābhimānino, te tāhibahūhi porāṇavaṇṇanāhituṭṭhiṃ navindanti. Tasmā taṃ yācantī’’tiyojanā. Etena appasāratthā eva tāporāṇavaṇṇanāyotipi dīpetiyeva. Tattha ‘‘tuṭṭhi’’nti santuṭṭhiṃ. Navindantinapaṭilabhanti. ‘‘Ye’’tiyejanā.
他们只把真实义当作值得骄傲的东西,尤其以欢喜为习性,所以叫“执著真实义者”。“tena”和前面的“avindanti”相连。再说,“te”指那些在古注中得不到满足的人;“maṃ”是作者指自己;“saṅgammā”就是聚集到一起之后。因为他们请求阐明胜义,所以这部复注名为“胜义灯”也就成立了。“mahaṇṇave”就是在大海中;“ratanāni”是金、银等珍宝;“uddharitvā”就是取出来之后。“yathicchakaṃvī”就是随其所欲;想要多少就多少,这是其意趣。“dajjeyyuṃ”是可以给予、随意给予的意思,因为“eyya”等语尾可以用来表示许可。“navattabbāvaūnatā”是说大海珍宝的缺少、减损确实不可说。为什么?因为大海是无数珍宝的依处。由于它被称为“sāgara”,所以它的意思是:对有财宝和珍宝者来说,如同家室内部一样的海。
Sāratthameva abhimānenti, visesena nandantisīlenāti sāratthābhimānino. Tenavindantītipurimenasambandho. Puna ‘‘te’’ti tāhi tuṭṭhiṃ avindantā tejanā. ‘‘Ma’’nti attānaṃ niddisati. ‘‘Saṅgammā’’ti samāgantvā. Yasmā paramatthassadīpanaṃ yācanti, tasmā imissāṭīkāya ‘‘paramatthadīpanī’’ti nāmaṃpi siddhaṃhoti. ‘‘Mahaṇṇave’’ti mahāsamudde. ‘‘Ratanānī’’ti suvaṇṇarajatādīni ratanāni. ‘‘Uddharitvā’’ti uddhaṃ āharitvā. ‘‘Yathicchakaṃvī’’tiyathicchitaṃpi. Yattakaṃ icchanti, tattakaṃvīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Dajjeyyuṃ’’ti dadeyyuṃ. Kāmaṃ dadantūti attho. Eyyādivacanānaṃ anumati atthepavattanato. ‘‘Navattabbāvaūnatā’’ti mahaṇṇaveratanānaṃ ūnatāhānitā navattabbāva. Kasmā, aparimāṇa ratanādhiṭṭhānattā mahāsamuddassa. Yato so sāgaroti vuccati, sānaṃdhanaratanānaṃ gehagabbhasadisattāsāgaroti hissa attho.
“同样,在这里”是指在《阿毗达摩义摄》中也是如此。“广大义”指广大的义理。“宝石譬”指像大海中的宝石。“百倍亦”指即使数百次。“愿注释”指随他们愿意去注释。“取尽无余”指周遍无余地取来、执取,也就是穷尽无遗的意思。“将不存在”指将不存在,将不会存在。“因此”是因为他们祈请,又因为旧注已穷尽、将不会存在,所以这样说。“于那些注释中”指在那些古注疏中。“注释”指新注释,也就是将作新注疏——这是句义上的关联。将作怎样的注释呢?所以说“种种理义圆满”等。其中,“明了词句”指清晰的词和清晰的句。“不过略不过广”指不过于简略,也不过于繁广。“慧迟钝者”指那些智慧迟钝的人。“迟钝”是软弱的意思,“慧”是智的意思。为令钝慧的听者觉悟、开晓,令智慧得以开发成就,所以叫“开觉迟钝慧”。“将作”即我将著作。“彼”即那部注释。“于究竟义欲通达义者且听”——这是句义连接。通达即熟练的状态,通达者即聪慧者、智者。以通达而求义者,即“欲通达义者”。“如是”一词,用于说明终结。为了让人知道开卷著作在此已完成终结,所以连接在开卷语句的末尾。各支分句也同样随顺此理而连接,于一切处皆然。
‘‘Tathevetthā’’ti etasmiṃ abhidhammattha saṅgahetatheva. ‘‘Vipulatthā’’ti mahantā atthā. ‘‘Ratanūpamā’’ti mahaṇṇave ratanasadisā. ‘‘Satakkhattuṃpī’’ti anekasatavāraṃpi. ‘‘Vaṇṇeyyuṃ’’ti kāmaṃvaṇṇentu. ‘‘Pariyādinnā’’ti parito anavasesato ādinnā gahitā. Parikkhīṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Nahessare’’ti nahessanti nabhavissanti. ‘‘Tasmā’’ti yasmāca yācanti, yasmāca pariyādinnānahessanti, tasmā. ‘‘Tāsuvaṇṇanāsū’’ti tāsu porāṇaṭīkāsu. ‘‘Vaṇṇana’’nti abhinavavaṇṇanaṃ, abhinavaṭīkaṃkarissanti sambandho. Kīdisaṃvaṇṇanaṃ karissatīti āha ‘‘nānāsārattha sampuṇṇa’’ntiādi. Tattha ‘‘uttānapadabyañjana’’nti uttānapadañca uttānavākyañca. ‘‘Nātisaṅkhepavitthāra’’nti nātisaṅkhepaṃnātivitthārañca. Mandā buddhi yesaṃ te mandabuddhino. ‘‘Mandā’’ti mudukā. ‘‘Buddhī’’ti ñāṇaṃ. Mandabuddhino sotujane pabodheti vikāseti, ñāṇa vikāsaṃpāpetīti mandabuddhippabodhanā. ‘‘Karissa’’nti karissāmi. ‘‘Ta’’nti taṃvaṇṇanaṃ. ‘‘Paramatthesupāṭavatthinosuṇantū’’ti yojanā. Paṭunobhāvopāṭavaṃ. Paṭunoti byattassapaṇḍitassa. Pāṭavena attho yesaṃ te pāṭavatthino. Itisaddo parisamāpanajotako. So hi ganthārabbhavidhānassa idhaparisamāpanaṃ pariniṭṭhānaṃ ñāpetuṃ ganthārabbhavākyassapariyante yojito. Avayava vākyānaṃ piyojīyatiyeva. Esanayosabbattha.
1做完论典开篇的说明之后,现在为了显示它与开头偈颂的关联,就说了“阿毗达摩义摄”等话。所谓关联,就是因和果的结合。其中,偈颂的出现是因,显示五种摄义是果,因和果的结合就叫作关联。“善系”是指带有果的系属。因为要依靠论典来说、应当被讲述,所以叫“论所应说”。随置词的业就是随置,随置的作用、随置的状态、随置状态之作——这样构成复合词。“此”是指敬礼三宝。这个关联已经显示出来了。“已说”就是已经讲说,也就是已经开示。“主要义”就是所指的意义、所意图的意义。义有两种:文辞义和所诠义。其中,“行”是去的意思,当说到“人”时,凡是能去的就用“行”这个词来表达,这是文辞义;而由“人”这个词所显示的主要义、所意图义、所诠义,就叫作“阿毗达摩义”。
1. Evaṃ ganthārabbhavidhānaṃ katvā idāni ādigāthāya sambandhaṃ dassento ‘‘abhidhammatthasaṅgaha’’ntiādimāha. Sambandhanti kāraṇapphalasaṃyogaṃ. Tattha gāthāpavattanaṃ kāraṇaṃ nāma. Pañcapiṇḍattha dassanaṃ phalaṃ nāma. Kāraṇapphalasaṃyogo sambandhonāma. ‘‘Sappayojane’’ti phalappayojanasahite. Ganthena abhidhātabbo kathetabboti ganthābhidheyyo. Nipatassa kammaṃ nipaccaṃ. Nipacca kiriyā, nipaccākāro, nipaccakārassakaraṇanti samāso. ‘‘Sā’’ti ratanattayavandanā. Dassitātisambandho. ‘‘Abhihitā’’ti kathitā. Pakāsitāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Padhānatthabhūtā’’ti adhippetatthabhūtāti adhippāyo. Duvidhohi atthovacanattho ca abhidhānatthoca. Tattha gacchatīti gato, purisoti vuttegacchati padena vutto yokoci gacchanto vacanatthonāma. Purisoti padenadassito padhānattho adhippetattho abhidheyyattho nāmāti. ‘‘Abhidhammatthā’’ti.
在这里,所说的阿毗达摩义,从究竟意义上分为四种:
心、心所、色和涅槃,从一切方面来说就是这些。
Tattha vuttābhidhammatthā, catudhā paramatthato; Cittaṃ cetasikaṃ rūpaṃ, nibbānamiti sabbathā. ti
这样说,就是所说的阿毗达摩义。正因为是这样说过的,所以这四种阿毗达摩义就是这里的主要含义;而且,主要含义在这里就是作为这部论所诠表者而被意指——由此可知,这就是意趣所在。
Evaṃ vuttā abhidhammatthā. Evaṃ vuttattāyevaca tecattāro abhidhammatthā eva idhapadhānatthabhūtāti ca, - padhānatthāeva idhaganthābhidheyya bhāvena adhippetāti caviññāyatīti adhippāyo.
如果有人这样说:他们虽然通达了阿毗达摩义,也达到了《摄论》,但应该另外有“摄义”这个名称,而不是叫“阿毗达摩义”。可是在这里,只有摄义才是以所应说的性质被当作意趣所在,所以说“所应说的就是阿毗达摩义这个词所指的摄”。也就是说,他们通达了阿毗达摩义、达到了《摄论》,仍然只是叫“阿毗达摩义”,并不会另外成为“摄义”这个名称。因此说的是“其中所说的阿毗达摩义”,而不是说“其中所说的摄义”。这样一来,就只是已摄之状态成为殊胜。这里所说的“所应说的”应当就是那个,所以说“已摄之状态也是所应说的”等。其中,“已摄之状态”是指心之摄、心所之摄等摄之作用。它并非离于已摄诸法而另有。正是在那些法中而被摄,所以说“已摄之状态也是所应说的”。即使并非离于那些法而另有,也仍然被彼所摄。然而它并不是论书的主要义。这里是以主要义为意趣,所以说“那是不好的”。为什么不好?回答说“因为不是”等。其中“hi”一词显示此句是原因句。此方法在后面的义注中也如此。从“从此以后”等,是论师避免过失之文。其中,“此摄的”指此阿毗达摩义摄。“第二”指第二复注。“两者”指两部复注。“《清净道论大疏》”指阿阇梨法护长老所作的名为《胜义宝箧》的复注。它是在缅甸,依据住在山岳寺的长老所作的《小复注》而作的大复注,这是众所周知的。就此而说此言。
Kecipanavadeyyuṃ, teabhidhammatthā saṅgahappakaraṇaṃ pattā visuṃ saṅgahatthānāmabhaveyyuṃ, naabhidhammatthā nāma. Idha ca saṅgahatthā eva abhidheyyabhāvena adhippetāti vuttaṃ abhidheyyo abhidhammattha saṅgahappadenāti. Vuccate. Teabhidhammatthā saṅgahappakaraṇaṃ pattāpi abhidhammatthā evanāma honti, na visuṃ saṅgahatthānāma. Tattha vuttābhidhammatthātihi vuttaṃ, natuvuttaṃ tattha vuttāsaṅgahatthāti. Evañcasati saṅgahitabhāvamattaṃ visiṭṭhaṃ hoti. Tadeva idha abhidheyyo nāma siyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅgahitabhāvopi abhidheyyo yevā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘saṅgahitabhāvo’’ticittasaṅgaho, cetasikasaṅgahotiādinā saṅgahaṇakiriyā. Sā saṅgahitehi dhammehi aññā nahoti. Tesvevadhammesusaṅgayhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅgahitabhāvopi abhidheyyo yevā’’ti. Kiñcāpitehi aññānahoti, te sveva saṅgayhati. Sāpana ganthassapadhānattho nahoti. Idha ca padhānatthova adhippetoti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃnasundara’’nti. Kasmā nasundaranti āha ‘‘nahiso’’tiādiṃ. Etthacahisaddo imassa vākyassahetuvākyabhāvaṃ joteti. Esanayoparatthapi. ‘‘Itopaṭṭhāya cā’’tiādi gantha garudosavivajjanaṃ. Tattha ‘‘imassasaṅgahassā’’ti imassaabhidhammatthasaṅgahassa. ‘‘Dutīyā’’tidutīyāṭīkā. ‘‘Dvepī’’ti dvepiṭīkāyo. ‘‘Visuddhimaggemahāṭīkā’’ti ācariyadhammapālattherena katāparamatthamañjūsānāmaṭīkā. Sā brammaraṭṭhe tiriyapabbatavāsinā therenakataṃ cūḷaṭīkaṃ upādāya mahāṭīkāti pākaṭā. Taṃsandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
著作的性质,和具有该性质的诸法在一起才能成立,不在一起就不能成立。基于这个意思,才说“以阿毗达摩义理之句”。虽然它和那些法在一起时成立、不在一起时不成立,但“阿毗达摩义理之句”并不表示摄集作用这一性质,所以说“那是不妥当的”。名称有两种:随义名和惯用名。其中,随顺意义而来的名称是随义名,比如对快乐的人取名为“乐”。没有意义根据而安立的名称是惯用名,比如对痛苦的人取名为“乐”。这里为了显示随义名,说“随义”等语。其中,“随义”即随顺自义,意思是随顺词语生起之因相。所谓“论之通称”,即论的通名。意思是说,是论的名字。摄集论名为“摄集论”,是指在经中于各处散说的诸法,以在一处摄集同类聚的方式而展开的论。受持它的人,以少量的论就能轻易了知许多法。“以受持、遍问等”中,受持和遍问二者是并列关系。以“等”字摄持忆持等。其中,将文句读诵令熟记,名为受持。受持了那文句之后,把握其意义,名为遍问。“无困难地”,即以无苦。应结合“应得之果与随果”。以自相而通达,即自相通达。以“等”字摄持相通达、味通达等。无取著般涅槃为终点、为究竟,即无取著般涅槃为终点。其中,“无取著般涅槃”是指以无贪爱、邪见取著诸蕴而般涅槃。也就是说,无余依般涅槃。“果与随果”,即果以及随果。其中,“果”是根本果。“随果”是展转果。能驱使,故为“目的”。能驱使,即令趣向。令什么趣向?令欲求果的人。令趣向何处?令趣向能生果之业。为了什么而令趣向?为了作那业。为了享受果,在种种享受果的作用中而被驱使,故说为“目的”。或者说,“以语义之力”,即以言说之力。什么是言说之力?因之言说也暗示果。果之言说也暗示因。譬如说“在某国善雨已降”,则可知“那国中安乐”。说“某国安乐”,则可知“那国中善雨已降”。然而,目的不需要以“阿毗达摩义”一词来表示,仅以摄集言说之力便已成立。基于这个意思,说“以摄集一词”。然而,在显示语义之力时,应当希求圆满完整的言说。否则,也可能产生不悦意的过失。为了显示这个道理,说“那是不妥当的”,然后以“因为”等因之语句证明其义。
Ganthappakāroca pakāravantehi dhammehi sahevasijjhati, vinā nasijjhatīti adhippāyena ‘‘soabhidhammatthapadenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāmañca so tehi sahevasijjhati, vinānasijjhati. Abhidhammatthapadaṃ pana saṅgahaṇakiriyāpakāraṃna vadatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ nasundara’’nti. Duvidhaṃ nāmaṃ anvatthanāmaṃ ruḷināmanti. Tattha, atthānugataṃ nāmaṃ anvatthanāmaṃ, yathā sukhitassajanassa sukhotināmaṃ. Attharahitaṃ āropitaṃ nāmaṃ ruḷināmaṃ, yathā dukkhitassajanassa sukhoti nāmaṃ. Idha pana anvatthanā mantidassetuṃ ‘‘atthānugatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘atthānugatā’’ti sakatthānugatā. Saddappavattinimittānugatāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ganthasamaññā’’ti ganthasammuti. Ganthassanāmanti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṅgahaganthonāma pāḷiyaṃtattha tattha vippakiṇṇedhamme ekattha sabhāgarāsikaraṇavasena pavatto gantho. Taṃ uggaṇhanto appakena ganthenabahukedhammesukhenajānāti. ‘‘Taduggahaparipucchādivasenā’’ti tassauggahoca paripucchācāti dvando. Ādisaddena dhāraṇādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha pāṭhassavācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggahonāma. Uggahi tassapāṭhassa atthaggahaṇaṃ paripucchānāma. ‘‘Anāyāsato’’ti niddukkhena. ‘‘Laddhabbaṃphalānuphala’’nti sambandho. Sarūpato avabujjhanaṃ sarūpāvabodho. Ādisaddena lakkhaṇāvabodho rasāva bodhotiādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Anupādāparinibbānaṃ anto pariyosānaṃ yassāti anupādāparinibbānantaṃ. Tattha ‘‘anupādāparinibbāna’’nti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi khandhesu anupādāyaparinibbānaṃ. Anupādisesa parinibbānanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Phalānuphala’’nti phalañceva anuphalañca. Tattha ‘‘phala’’nti mūlapphalaṃ. ‘‘Anuphala’’nti paramparapphalaṃ. Payojetīti ‘‘payojanaṃ’’. Payojetīti niyojeti. Kiṃ niyojeti. Phalatthikaṃjanaṃ. Kattha niyojeti. Phalanibbattakekamme. Kimatthāya niyojeti. Tassakammassa karaṇatthāyāti. Phalānubhavanatthāya tatthatattha phalānubhavanakiccesu payujjīyatīti payojananti pivadanti. ‘‘Sāmatthiyato’’ti vacanasāmatthiyato. Kiṃ vacanasāmatthiyanti. Kāraṇavacanaṃ phalaṃpidīpeti. Phalavacanaṃ kāraṇaṃpidīpeti. Yathātaṃ asukasmiṃ raṭṭhe sammādevo vuṭṭhoti vutte taṃ raṭṭhaṃsu bhikkhanti viññāyati. Asukaraṭṭhaṃ subhikkhantivutte tasmiṃ raṭṭhe sammādevo vuṭṭhoti viññāyatīti. Payojanaṃ pana abhidhammattha saddena dassetabbaṃ natthi, saṅgahavacanasāmatthiyeneva siddhaṃ hotīti adhippāyena ‘‘saṅgahasaddenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sāmatthiyadassane pana suṭṭhu paripuṇṇavacanaṃ icchitabbaṃ hoti. Itarathā aniṭṭhatthappasaṅgopi siyāti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ na sundara’’nti vatvā ‘‘nahī’’tiādinā hetuvākyena tadatthaṃ sādheti.
2在具有目的的五种总摄义中,先已显示了五种总摄义本身,现在为了逐一说明这五种总摄义各自的五种目的,而说“其中”等语。“其中”,就是指这五种总摄义当中。不应被计数的,称为不可计数,意思是无法计算。不应被测量的,称为不可测量,意思是无法测量。这样一来,在某些情况下,作用和条件就能显示其可能的意义。为了用巴利圣典的文句来证成“自说”,先问“如所说”,随后引出巴利偈颂。其中,“如所说”就是“如何说”的意思。对于紧接前文所述之义,其证成的语句,在巴利圣典中如何说,在义注中如何说,在复注中如何说,应随宜理解其义。“对如此般寂灭、无所畏惧者作供养”,这是句子的连接。其中,“他们”指佛陀与佛弟子。“如此般”指具备如此形相、戒蕴等功德者。“寂灭”指因烦恼的寂灭而寂灭。无论从何处皆无畏惧者,称为无所畏惧者,即不来者与漏尽者。“畏惧”指内心的惊怖与畏惧。“作供养”即正在供养者。“那是目的”,意即礼敬三宝的目的。“摄集作者”指佛音长老等后来的义注作者。他们从古义注中,将各处散在的种种抉择与应结合之处加以摄集,而制作出新义注。因此,所有新义注都称为“摄集”。那些阿阇梨便被称作“摄集作者”。因此说“摄集作者即佛音……被称为”。他们只希望遮止障碍,如何得知呢?为了说明由他们的话语而得知,引出摄集作者的偈颂。“以礼敬三宝这一供养的威力,将障碍无余摧毁”,这是句子的连接。“Hī”是显示词,表示已知的原因。“所说”指在《义蕴论》中所说。
2. Evaṃ sappayojane pañcapiṇḍattheti ettha pañcapiṇḍatthe dassetvā idāni tesaṃpañcannaṃ piṇḍatthānaṃ visuṃvisuṃ pañcappayojanāni dassento ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti tesupañcasu piṇḍatthesu. Nasaṅkhyātabbanti asaṅkhyeyyaṃ. Saṅkhātuṃasakkuṇeyyanti attho. Napametabbanti appameyyaṃ. Pametuṃ asakkuṇeyyanti attho. Evaṃ kiccapaccayānaṃ katthaci sakkattha dīpanaṃ hoti. Sakavacanaṃ pāḷivacanena sādhetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’ti pucchitvā pāḷigāthaṃ āhari. Tattha ‘‘yathāhā’’ti kathaṃ āha iccevattho. Anantare vuttassa atthassa sādhakaṃ vacanaṃ kathaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āha, kathaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āha, kathaṃ ṭīkāyaṃ āhāti evaṃ yathārahaṃ attho veditabbo. ‘‘Tetādisenibbute akutobhaye pūjayato’’ti yojanā. Tattha ‘‘te’’ti buddha buddha sāvake. ‘‘Tādise’’ti tathā rūpesī lakkhandhādiguṇa sampanne. ‘‘Nibbute’’ti kilesa nibbānena nibbute. Natthi kutoci hetuto bhayaṃ yesaṃ te akuto bhayā. Anāgāmi khīṇāsavā. ‘‘Bhaya’’nti cittutrāsabhayaṃ. ‘‘Pūjayato’’ti pūjentassa. ‘‘Taṃ payojana’’ntitassāratanattaya vandanāya payojanaṃ. ‘‘Saṅgahakārā’’ti buddhaghosattherādayo pacchima aṭṭhakathākārā vuccanti. Tehi porāṇaṭṭhakathāsu tattha tattha vippakiṇṇepakiṇṇakavinicchayeyuttaṭṭhānesu saṅgahetvā abhinava aṭṭhakathāyo karonti. Tasmā sabbāabhinavaaṭṭhakathāyo saṅgahā nāma honti. Te ca ācariyā saṅgahakārā nāma. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅgahakārāti buddhaghosa. Pe… vuccantī’’ti. Te antarāya nīvāraṇameva icchantīti kathaṃ viññāyatīti ce. Tesaṃ vacanena viññāyatīti dassetuṃ saṅgahakāra gāthaṃ āhari. ‘‘Ratanattayekatassa etassanipaccakārassa ānubhāvena antarāye asesatososetvāti yojanā. ‘‘Hī’’ti ñāpakahetu jotako. ‘‘Vutta’’nti aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ vuttaṃ.
3“如何而有呢?”这是连接语。这是提问。“被说”是回答,正在被解说。“hi”是详述的指示词。“礼敬是完成业行的福德流注”是连接语。“于种种……次”是在持续连接义上使用的业格。“福德流注”就是福德之流,是福德流注的同义词。“而那成为福德之殊胜”是连接语。为什么那成为福德之殊胜呢?为了显示这是由田地的圆满和意乐的圆满而成为的,所以说了“于无上……”等。“已增长”就是已被增长。福德流注。已被增长的状态就是已增长性。就像用各种香薰染极清净的衣服一样,已被薰染。正是福德流注。已被薰染的状态就是已被薰染性。这两处都是以原因之义使用从格。“大光辉”就是大威力。“大果”是以根本果而有大果。“大效益”是以效益果而有大效益。而效益果指的是辗转之果。超越其他福德而存续、流转,所以是殊胜。既是福德又是殊胜,所以是福德殊胜。殊胜的福德、增上的福德,就是这个意思。“它给予助力,给予机会”是连接语。怎样给予助力,又怎样给予机会呢?说了“自身精进圆满的状态已确立”等。其中,自身精进圆满是指对过去福德业更强力的支持业。“外部”是指从外部相续。“于衰败缘、于圆满缘”应当连接起来理解。其中,衰败缘是指像来自国王或盗贼等所生的苦生起之缘。圆满缘是指对身心的适益之缘。四种缘、护持的家众、守护天神等是乐生起之缘。以那些缘,多喜悦的长老相续中,日以继夜地转起喜、轻安、乐、定,内在的时节、心、食等也变得极其殊胜。由它们生起的身中住界也变得极其殊胜而滋养。其中,身中住界是指地等、风、胆汁、痰等。“给予助力”就是令生起新的力量。“对其他福德”就是对能生转起异熟的多种福德业。“那时”就是在那时之义。“成为强而有力”就是从本来的力量成为极有力。“在那长老的相续中”是连接语。“充满可爱果之稠密”就是充满可爱果色相续之稠密。“无有所谓机会”就是没有所谓立足的机会。“如是”就是因此。“从远处即被除去”是连接语。障碍可爱果相续、压迫毁坏可爱果相续的业,即能生不可爱果相续的业、能生不善的业、非福德业,这三种不善业从远处即被除去,因为要让它们的异熟没有机会,这是意旨。因此说了“不……”等。“由此”就是因此,由于非福德业从远处被除去。对可礼敬的父母、沙门、婆罗门等,行礼敬业而作尊重,名为礼敬习惯。他有这个,所以是有礼敬习惯者。以将自己置于低位而恭敬具德长老、耆年长老,以这种习惯为敬重耆宿者。这两处都是与格。如是等是出处语。结语就是终结。因此这些是所得义语。所得义是指净化各各所缘、令圆满后所得的清净义。同样,由语词能力所得的义理也是这里所意趣的。“不仅是为了长老无障圆满达成”是连接语。“也是为了听众的领受之务得以成就”是连接语。听闻者就是听众。他们的。“正在领受者”就是正在学习的人。“以礼敬成就”就是从礼敬福德的成就。在速行决断中,因为所谓障碍的排除是现法中所期望的果。而现法是第一速行的异熟领域。因此,即使达到支持的作用,这里仍以第一速行思为所摄,以此意旨说了“成为现法受的”。然而,那第一速行思即使达到支持的作用,也应是全然微弱的。为什么?因为未得习行。其余诸思应是强力的。为什么?因为已得习行,应如此见。“由于在七速行的分位中被意趣,应被获得,所以那是不善巧的”是连接语。“如是”是语句结束。“如同是微少的,同样也是微少的”应当连接起来。“因为那样”就是因此之义。在《发趣论》中也是:段食对此身以食缘为缘,是分别的。否则,就应分别“段食对食等起色以食缘为缘”。“就在现在”就是在此生中。如此阐明礼敬的用途后,现在为了阐明其余摄义的用途,说了“然而因为……”等。其中,“于最初已知念”等中——听闻“我将说阿毗达摩义摄”之句而了知念,“精勤生起”。学习了此,我们将在极难得的阿毗达摩义中无劳而了知,并将成为彼根本的无取涅槃之用途的享有者,如此心生起,这是意旨。
3. ‘‘Kathañcahotī’’ti sambandho. Iti ayaṃ pucchā. ‘‘Vuccate’’ti visajjanā kathīyate. ‘‘Hī’’tivitthārajotako. ‘‘Vandanā kiriyābhinipphādako puññappavāho’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Aneka…pe… vāre’’ti accanta saṃyogatthe upayoga vacanaṃ. ‘‘Puññābhisando’’ti puññābhisoto, puññappavāhoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. ‘‘So ca puññātissayo hotī’’ti sambandho. Kasmā so puññā tissayo hotīti. Khetta sampattiyā ca ajjhāsaya sampattiyā ca hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘anuttaresū’’tiādimāha. Saṃvaḍḍhitthāti saṃvaḍḍhito. Puññābhisando. Saṃvaḍḍhitassabhāvo saṃvaḍḍhitattaṃ. Sugandhehiviya suparisuddhaṃvatthaṃ paribhāvīyitthāti paribhāvito. Puññābhisandoyeva. Paribhāvitassa bhāvo paribhāvitattaṃ. Ubhayatthāpi hetu atthe nissakkavacanaṃ. ‘‘Mahājutiko’’ti mahātejo. ‘‘Mahapphalo’’ti mūlapphalena mahapphalo. ‘‘Mahānisaṃso’’ti ānisaṃsapphalena mahānisaṃso. Ānisaṃsapphalanti ca paramparā phalaṃ vuccati. Aññaṃ puññaṃ atikkamanto sayati pavattatīti atissayo. Puññañca taṃ atissayocāti puññātissayo. Atissayapuññaṃ, adhika puññanti attho. ‘‘So anubalaṃ deti, okāsalābhaṃ karotī’’ti sambandho. Kathañca anubalaṃ deti, kathañca okāsalābhaṃ karotīti āha ‘‘sayaṃ payoga sampattibhāveṭhatvā’’tiādiṃ. Tattha payogasampattināma atīta puññakammānaṃ balavataraṃ upatthambhakakammaṃ hoti. ‘‘Bahiddhā’’ti bahiddhasantānato. ‘‘Vipattipaccaye sampattipaccaye’’ti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha, vipattipaccayānāma-rājatovā coratovā-tiādinā āgatā dukkhuppattipaccayā. Sampattipaccayānāma kāyacittānaṃ sappāya paccayā. Cattāro paccayā ca upaṭṭhākakulāni ca ārakkha devatādayo ca sukhuppatti paccayā. Tehi paccayehi pāmojja bahu lassa therassa santāne rattidivaṃ pītipassaddhisukhasamādhīnaṃ pavattiyā ajjhattabhūtā utucittāhārā ca ati paṇītā honti. Tehi samuṭṭhitā sarīraṭṭhakadhātuyo ca atipaṇītā eva hutvā upabrūhanti. Tattha sarīraṭṭhakadhātuyo nāma pathavi ādayo vātapittasemhādayoca. ‘‘Anubalaṃdetī’’tiabhinavaṃthāmabalaṃ pavatteti. ‘‘Puññantarassā’’ti pavattivipākajanakassa bahuvidhassa puñña kammassa. ‘‘Athā’’ti tasmiṃ kāleti attho. ‘‘Balavabalavantiyo hutvā’’ti pakati balato atibalavantiyo hutvā. ‘‘Tasmiṃ therasantāne’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Iṭṭhapphalaghanapūrite’’ti iṭṭhapphalabhūtānaṃ rūpasantatīnaṃ ghanena pūrite. ‘‘Okāso nāma natthī’’ti patiṭṭhānokāso nāma natthi. ‘‘Itī’’ti tasmā. ‘‘Dūrato apanītāneva hontī’’ti sambandho. Iṭṭhapphalasantānaṃ vibādhanti nīvārentīti iṭṭhapphalasantānavibādhakāni upapīḷakūpaghātakakammāni. Aniṭṭhapphala santāna janakāni, akusala janaka kammāni, apuñña kammānīti tānitividhāni akusalakammāni dūrato apanītāneva honti, tesaṃ vipākassa anokāsakaraṇenāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘nahī’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Tato’’ti tasmā apuñña kammānaṃ dūrato apanītattā. Abhivādetabbānaṃ mātāpitu samaṇabrāhmaṇādīnaṃ abhivādanakammegaruṃkaraṇaṃ abhivādana sīlaṃ nāma. Taṃ assa atthīti abhivādanasīlī. Guṇavuddhavayavuddhe apaceti attānaṃ nīcavutti karaṇena pūjetisīlenāti vuddhāpacāyī. Ubhayatthāpisampadāna vacanaṃ. Evantiādini gamana vacanaṃ. Nigamanti ca niṭṭhaṅgamanaṃ. Tasmātiādi laddhaguṇa vacanaṃ. Laddhaguṇoti ca taṃtaṃpasaṅga visodhanaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā laddhovisuddho attho vuccati. Tathā vacana sāmatthiyena laddho atthantaropi ayamidha adhippeto. ‘‘Nakevalañca therasseva anantarāyena parisamāpanatthaṃ hotī’’ti yojanā. ‘‘Sotūnañcagahaṇa kicca sampajjanattha’’ntisambandho. Suṇantīti sotāro. Tesaṃ. ‘‘Gaṇhantāna’’nti uggaṇhantānaṃ. ‘‘Vandanāsiddhiyā’’tira tanattayevandanā puññassasiddhito. Javanavinicchaye yasmā antarāya nīvāraṇaṃnāma diṭṭhadhamme icchitabbaṃ phalaṃ hoti. Diṭṭha dhammo ca pathama javanassa vipākakkhettaṃ. Tasmā upatthambhana kiccaṃ patvāpi pathama javana cetanā eva idhapariyattāti adhippāyena ‘‘diṭṭhadhammavedanīyabhūtā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā pana pathama javana cetanā upatthambhana kiccaṃ patvāpi sabbadubbalā evasiyā. Kasmā, aladdhāsevanattā. Sesa cetanāyo eva balavatiyo siyuṃ. Kasmā, laddhā sevanattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Sattajavanapakkhe adhippetattā upaladdhabbattā taṃ nasundara’’nti sambandho. ‘‘Itī’’ti vākyaparisamāpanaṃ. ‘‘Yathā appamattakaṃ hoti. Evamevaṃ appamattakaṃ hotī’’ti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Tathāhī’’ti tato evāti attho. Paṭṭhānepi=kabaḷīkāroāhāro imassakāyassa āhāra paccayenapaccayo=tivibhatto. Itarathā ‘kabaḷīkāro āhāro āhārasamuṭṭhānānaṃ rūpānaṃ āhārapaccayena paccayo’ti vibhatto siyāti. ‘‘Adhunāvā’’ti imasmiṃ bhave eva. Evaṃ vandanāyapayojanaṃ dīpetvā idāni sesānaṃ piṇḍatthānaṃ payojanaṃ dīpetuṃ ‘‘yasmāpanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha, ‘‘āditoviditesatī’’tiādimhi-bhāsissaṃ abhidhammattha saṅgaha-nti padaṃ sutvā viññātesati, ‘‘ussāhojāyati’’. Imaṃ uggahetvā sudullabhe abhidhammatthe ca anāyāsena jānissāma, tammūlakassa ca anupādā parinibbānantassa payojanassabhāgino bhavissāmāti cittuppāda sambhavatoti adhippāyo.
4第四,词义解说。“Bujjhī”就是了知。“Etthā”就是在这个词里。Ca 这个字是标示句子开端的。所谓句子开端,就是在根本句里,凡是应当说而还没有说的内容,为了说明那些内容而发起的后续句。Bujjhanakiriyā 称为智。那么问:在无颠倒的意义上运作的“正”字,怎么能显示无余遍照呢?为了回答这个问题,先简略说明差别和随顺,再详细展开,所以说了“tathāhī”等话。其中,“tathāhī”就是:那句话的详细解释是这样的——这样加以阐明。“Aviparītaṃ”是修饰动作的词。“Attano visaye evā”就是只在自身的智的范围内,是它们(诸法)的境域,这样连接。因为即使一个法,也依时间、处所、相续等分别而成为无量差别。所以,依处智的辟支佛等,连一个法也不能从一切方面了知。因此说了“tehī”等话。其中,“sabbākārato”就是以自性、因、缘、果、异熟、时间、处所等的方式。“Yatthā”就是在那个非境域的法上。“Te viparītaṃ bujjheyyuṃ, so avisayo nāmadhammo natthī”是这样连接的:如果他们颠倒地了知,那种非境域的法就不存在。为了详细说明这一点,说了“tehī”等话。其中,“tiyaddhagate”就是在三时中已生起的、正在运作的。“Addhāmuttake”就是脱离三时的。“Hatthamaṇikeviyā”就像放在手掌上的宝珠一样。“Sabbe dhammā”等是证明圣典的。其中,“āpātaṃ”就是迎面而落。也有“ābādhanti”的读法,意思是遍覆而现起。“Sabbaññumahābhavaṅgaṃ”就是一切诸佛在最后一生中,从结生开始运作的八种大异熟中的第一种大异熟——有分心。“Tatthā”就是在那个大有分中。“Niccakālaṃ upaṭṭhahantī”就是一切时都现起,成为现起的状态而住立。为什么?因为没有任何障碍。这也是名为一种现起。“Āvajjanāyā”就是由意门转向心。法是广大的。有分是微小的。所以微小的有分在一个刹那中不能容纳广大的诸法——这是责难者的意图。“Na codetabbam etaṃ”就是这个地方不应责难。“Paramukkaṃsapattānaṃ”中,“ukkaṃso”就是超越、无上。paramo ukkaṃso paramukkaṃso,这样分解。
4. Padatthe. ‘‘Bujjhī’’ti aññāsi. ‘‘Etthā’’ti etasmiṃ pade. Ca saddo vākyārambha jotako. Vākyā rambhoti ca mūlavākye yaṃ yaṃ vattabbaṃ avuttaṃ, tassa tassa kathanatthāya anuvākyassa ārambho. Bujjhanakiriyāvuccatiñāṇaṃ. Kathaṃpanaaviparītatthe pavatto sammāsaddo asesa byāpanaṃ dīpetīti pucchāya purimatthame vabyatirekato ca anvayato ca puna vitthārento ‘‘tathāhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha, ‘‘tathāhī’’ti tassa vacanassa ayaṃ vitthāroti joteti. ‘‘Aviparīta’’nti kiriyāvisesana padametaṃ. ‘‘Attano visaye evā’’ti attano ñāṇavisaye eva tesaṃ visayocāti sambandho. Yasmā ekopi dhammo kāladesasantānādibhedena ananta bhedo hoti. Tasmā padesañāṇikā paccekabuddhādayo ekadhammaṃpi sabbākārato jānituṃ na sakkonti. Tenāha ‘‘tehī’’tiādiṃ. Tattha ‘‘sabbākārato’’ti sabhāvato, hetuto, paccayato, phalato, nissandato, kālato, desatotiādinā ākārena. ‘‘Yatthā’’ti yasmiṃ avisayedhamme. ‘‘Te viparītaṃ bujjheyyuṃ, so avisayo nāmadhammonatthī’’tiyojanā. Taṃ vitthārento ‘‘tehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha, ‘‘tiyaddhagate’’ti tīsukālesu gate pavatte. ‘‘Addhāmuttake’’ti kālattayavimuttake. ‘‘Hatthamaṇikeviyā’’ti hattha tale ṭhapitamaṇiratanāniviya. ‘‘Sabbe dhammā’’tiādi pāḷisādhakaṃ. Tattha, ‘‘āpāta’’nti abhimukhaṃ patanaṃ. Ābādhantipi pāṭho, ottharitvā upaṭṭhānanti attho. ‘‘Sabbaññumahābhavaṅga’’nti sabbesaṃsabbaññubuddhānaṃ pacchimabhave paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya pavattaṃ aṭṭhasu mahāvipākesu pathamamahāvipākaṃ bhavaṅga cittaṃ. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti tasmiṃ mahābhavaṅge. ‘‘Niccakālaṃ upaṭṭhahantī’’ti sabbakālaṃ upaṭṭhānākāra pattā hutvā tiṭṭhanti. Kasmā, kassaci āvaraṇassa abhāvato. Idaṃpihi ekaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti. ‘‘Āvajjanāyā’’ti manodvārāvajjana cittena. Dhammā mahantā. Bhavaṅgaṃ parittakaṃ. Tasmā parittakaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ ekakkhaṇe mahantānaṃ dhammānaṃ napahotīti codakassa adhippāyo. ‘‘Nacodetabbameta’’nti etaṃ ṭhānaṃ nacodetabbaṃ. ‘‘Paramukkaṃsapattāna’’nti ettha ‘‘ukkaṃso’’ti accuggamo accuttaro. Paramo ukkaṃso paramukkaṃsotiviggaho.
这样分析了sammā这个词的含义之后,现在来分析saṃ这个词的含义,所以说“saṃsaddopanā”等话。其中,“upasaggo”是指前缀词。“Paṭivedhadhammesū”是指在缘起等法的通达智中。没有老师,就叫anācariyo。在复合词末尾加上ka,就成了anācariyako。anācariyaka的状态就是anācariyakatā,也就是anācariyakataṃ。第三无色定名为无所有处禅那,世尊在阿罗逻迦罗摩处学习它。第四无色定名为非想非非想处禅那,世尊在郁陀迦罗摩子处学习它,所以说“āḷārudakamūlikā”。“Analaṅkaritvā”是指不以省察、入定等方式充分修习。也就是说没有反复修习。“Chaḍḍitattā”:见到这些定于菩提并不充分,只能引生第三、第四无色界的有,因为这样见到过患而舍弃它们。“Bujjhanakiriyāyā”是指通达智。“Kuto paṭivedhadhammā”是指那些通达法从何而来。通达法本身就是成佛的基础,这是(这里的)意趣。
Evaṃ sammāsaddassa atthaṃ vicāretvā idāni saṃsaddassa atthaṃ vicārento ‘‘saṃsaddopanā’’tiādimāha. Tattha, ‘‘upasaggo’’ti upasaggapadaṃ. ‘‘Paṭivedhadhammesū’’ti paṭiccasamuppādādīnaṃ paṭivijjhanaññāṇesu. Natthi ācariyo etassāti anācariyo. Samāsante kakārena saha anācariyako. Anācariyakassa bhāvo anācariyakatā. Taṃ anācariyakataṃ. Tatīyā ruppasamāpatti nāma ākiñcaññāyatanajjhānaṃ. Taṃ bhagavā āḷārassa santike uggaṇhāti. Catutthāruppasamāpatti nāma nevasaññā nāsaññāyatanajjhānaṃ. Taṃ udakassasantike uggaṇhātīti vuttaṃ ‘‘āḷārudakamūlikā’’ti. ‘‘Analaṅkaritvā’’ti āvajjanasamāpajjanādivasena analaṅkaritvā. Anāsevitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Chaḍḍitattā’’ti etāsamāpattiyonālaṃ bodhāya, atha kho yāvadeva tatīya catutthāruppabhavappaṭilābhāya saṃvattantīti evaṃ ādīnavaṃ disvā chaḍḍitattā. ‘‘Bujjhanakiriyāyā’’ti paṭivedhaññāṇassa. ‘‘Kuto paṭivedhadhammā’’ti tā kuto paṭivedhadhammā honti. Paṭivedhadhammā eva ca buddhabhāvāyapadaṭṭhānāhontīti adhippāyo.
在巴利圣典中,“Pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu”这句话的意思是:在这有(生命)之前,没有从任何人那里听闻过的善妙四谛之法。“Abhisambujjhī”这个词,说的是名为正菩提的阿拉汉道智。那智正是一切知智的近因。以那智为缘,在它无间断之后,一切知智就生起,所以说“tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ pāpuṇāti”。“Tadanantarā”指的是阿拉汉道心路以及四种观察之后那些无间之际。“Nimittatthe”指在相因的意义中。“Bhumma”是注释书中出现的第七种格的名字。因为在那些注释书里,依次出现了paccattavacana、upayogavacana、karaṇavacana、sampadānavacana、nissakkavacana、sāmivacana、bhumma vacana这样七种格的名称。
Pāḷiyaṃ. ‘‘Pubbe ananussutesudhammesū’’ti imasmiṃ bhave ito pubbe kassacisantike ananussute sucatussacca dhammesu. ‘‘Abhisambujjhī’’tipade abhisambodhisaṅkhātaṃ arahattamaggaññāṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tadeva ñāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tappaccayā tadanantarā evasabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pātubbhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti. ‘‘Tadanantarā’’ti ca arahatta maggavīthiyāca catunnaṃ paccavekkhana vārānañca anantare kāleti attho. ‘‘Nimittatthe’’ti nimitta hetvatthe. ‘‘Bhumma’’nti aṭṭhakathāsuāgataṃ sattamīvibhattiyānāmaṃ. Tāsu hi paccattavacanaṃ, upayogavacanaṃ, karaṇa vacanaṃ, sampadāna vacanaṃ, nissakkavacanaṃ, sāmivacanaṃ, summavacananti evaṃ anukkamena sattannaṃ vibhattīnaṃ nāmāni āgatānīti.
“十力智”是指在处非处善巧智等十种智之力中。“自在”在这里的意思是:能够随自己的意愿掌控,这种能力所构成的殊胜之力就叫“自在”。就像“vasigaṇehi”等说法中那样,具有自在的人就叫“得自在者”。得自在者的状态就是“自在”,意思是自在的状态。因此说“自在”,就是主宰的状态。不过在有些地方也能看到“vasī”以阴性词的形式出现,比如“tatrimā pañca vasiyo:āvajjanavasī, samāpajjanavasī”等句子中。
‘‘Dasabalaññāṇesū’’ti ṭhānāṭhāna kosallaññāṇādīsu dasa ñāṇabalesu. ‘‘Vasibhāva’’nti ettha attano vasaṃ vattetuṃ samatthatā saṅkhātosatti viseso vasonāma. Vaso etassa atthīti vasī-vasigaṇehītiādīsuviya. Vasino bhāvo vasibhāvo. Taṃ vasibhāvanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘vasibhāva’’nti issarabhāvanti. Katthaci pana ‘‘vasī’’ti itthiliṅgapadaṃpi dissati=tatrimā pañcavasiyo āvajjanavasīsamāpajjanavasī=tiādīsu.
5第五,无匹词。由许多功德词所引发的礼赞,叫做“涉及许多功德词之义”。“Itikiṃdutīyenā”的意思是:既然如此,第二个无匹词有什么用呢?应当这样连接:“Nana samatthā”——并非不能,并非没有能力。其意旨是:正是有能力的。“Mattakārino”指做事有分寸的人。“Thero ca tesaṃ aññataro”——那位长老是他们当中的一位,所以他不做限量,因此引出了第二个无匹词。“Apicā”:还有些应说之事。“Nakevalaṃ vandanāya antarāyanīvāraṇameva icchi tabbaṃ hotī”应当这样连接:并非仅仅希望遮除礼赞之障碍而已。“Vandanāyā”:以礼敬为因。那也是智慧明敏等之义。“Ganthapārisuddhiyā”:所谓文书的过失,即文句过失、句义过失、义理过失等。为使此论从那些过失中清净。然而,礼敬如何成为智慧明敏等之义呢?所以说“anussatiṭṭhānesū”等。所谓随念处,即佛、法、僧、戒等。能带来心一境性,故为“能带来心一境性”。“Tikkhāsūrāhutvāvahatī”:于甚深义理与文句之处,成为锐利、勇健、无滞碍而运持。“Tadatthāyapī”:也为智慧明敏等之义。功德名词在功德义、名词、分解、语句中明显,在已成词中不明显。因此,那些不知分解义的人面前,它们就只是名词而已,所以说“yathāvutta vacanatthayogepi…pe… pavattattā”。“Sabhāvaniruttiṃ jānantānaṃ”指知道摩揭陀语的人。摩揭陀语被称为根本语、圣语、摩揭陀语、巴利语、法语、自性语。“Bhāvatthasuñña”中,功德名词的功德义名为bhāvattho。它被称为evasakattho、vacanattho、viggahattho。在动词名词等中也是如此。“Satthū”即satthuno。“Samaññāmattaṃ”不值得成为只是名称概念。正如给孤独长者到了王舍城,听说佛出现于世,便说出优陀那:连这个声音在世间也难得,即佛。因此,佛这个名字在世间也是极大的难得功德词。称为正等觉的名字实在无可言说。“Sabhāvaniruttiṃ ajānantānaṃ pana padasahassaṃ vuccamānaṃpī”:且置一个无匹词,即使说千句,也只是导师的名称概念而已。那样的人连这世间极大的功德词也不知道。他们怎能知道bhāvattha呢?
5. Atulapade . Anekehiguṇapadehi pavattitāvandanā ‘‘anekaguṇapadavisayānāma’’. ‘‘Itikiṃdutīyenā’’ti iti tasmā dutīyena atulapadena kiṃ payojanaṃ atthīti attho. ‘‘Nana samatthā’’ti nasamatthā na hotīti yojanā. Samatthā evāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Mattakārino’’ti pamāṇakārino. ‘‘Thero ca tesaṃ aññataro’’, tasmā mattaṃ na karoti, dutīyaṃ atula padaṃ āharīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Apicā’’ti kiñci vattabbaṃ atthīti attho. ‘‘Nakevalaṃ vandanāya antarāyanīvāraṇameva icchi tabbaṃ hotī’’ti yojanā. ‘‘Vandanāyā’’ti vandanāhetu. Sopi paññāpāṭavādi attho. ‘‘Ganthapārisuddhiyā’’ti ganthadosānāma padadosa vākyadosa atthadosādayo atthi. Tehi dosehi imassa ganthassa pārisuddhiyā. Kathaṃ pana vandanāya paññāpāṭavādi atthosambhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘anussatiṭṭhānesū’’tiādi. Anussatiṭṭhānāni nāma buddha dhamma saṅghasīlādīni. Cittasamādhānaṃ āvahatīti cittasamādhānāvaho. ‘‘Tikkhāsūrāhutvāvahatī’’ti gambhīresu attha byañjana padesu amandā vissaṭṭhā hutvā vahati. ‘‘Tadatthāyapī’’ti paññāpāṭavādi atthāyapi. Guṇanāmapadānaṃ guṇatthonāmaviggaha vākyesu pākaṭo, siddhapadesu apākaṭo. Tasmā tāni viggahatthaṃ ajānantānaṃ santike nāma mattāni sampajjantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘yathāvutta vacanatthayogepi…pe… pavattattā’’ti. ‘‘Sabhāvaniruttiṃ jānantāna’’nti māgadha bhāsaṃ jānantānaṃ. Māgadhabhāsāhi mūlabhāsāti ca ariyabhāsāti ca māgadhabhāsāti ca pāḷibhāsāti ca dhammaniruttīti ca sabhāvaniruttīti ca vuccati. ‘‘Bhāvatthasuñña’’nti ettha guṇanāmānaṃ guṇattho bhāvattho nāma. So evasakatthoti ca vacanatthoti ca viggahatthoti ca vuccati. Kiriyanāmādīsūpi esevanayo. ‘‘Satthū’’ti satthuno. ‘‘Samaññāmatta’’nti nāmasaññāmattaṃ bhavituṃ nārahati. Tathāhi anāthapiṇḍikoseṭṭhi rājagahaṃ anupatto buddho loke uppannoti sutvā udānaṃ udānesi=ghosopi kho esodullabho lokasmiṃ yadidaṃ buddho=ti. Tasmā buddhoti nāmaṃpi loke mahantaṃ sudullabhaṃguṇapadaṃ hoti. Sammāsambuddha nāmevattabbamevanatthīti. ‘‘Sabhāvaniruttiṃ ajānantānaṃ pana padasahassaṃ vuccamānaṃpī’’ti tiṭṭhatu ekaṃ atulapadaṃ, padasahassaṃpi vuccamānaṃ satthusamaññāmattameva sampajjati. Tādisāhi janā idaṃ loke mahantaṃ guṇapadantipi najānanti. Bhāvatthaṃ kiṃjānissanti.
“无与伦比者”这个称呼有两种理解:一是说他和别人不相似,二是说没有他人与他相似。在证成的偈颂里,“补特伽罗对等者”指的是自称与对方相等的人。虽然末伽梨和富兰那等人各自宣称“我是一切知者、一切见者”“我是正自觉者”,以对等者的姿态四处游走,但从法义上说,他们在须弥山王面前就像碎石瓦砾一样。“并非不可思议”的意思是:这本来就不该让人觉得不可思议。所谓“已成就佛位者”,就是指已经证得佛位的人。整句连起来是:已成就佛位者所具有的无与伦比,这并不稀奇。如果这都不算稀奇,那什么才算稀奇呢?于是接着说了“今日所生者”等话。这里的“今日所生者”,指的是就在今天刚出生的这位世尊。那怎么知道他的无与伦比呢?于是说了“那时”等话。“成为同一平面”就是变成一片平地。那时,由于菩萨的福德威力,出现了极其广大的光明。经中说“出现了广大光明,超越了诸天的天威神力”,说的就是这个。被那光明照到的一切大地、山岳等,都像天然水晶块一样清澈明净。一万个轮围界变成一片平地显现出来。因此说“无数千个轮围界成为同一平面”。“以最上的供养”,指的是以赞叹和吉祥语的供养。“对世间”,是从一切有情世间来说。他就是这样发出无畏之语,因为被法性所推动。这里的“无畏语”,就是无所畏惧的话。也有版本读作“最上语”,意思是最殊胜的话。“发出”,就是说出。为了说明这也不稀奇、还有比这更稀奇的事,于是开始说“然而当……”等话。意思是说:除了其他大菩提有情之外,在波罗蜜功德方面,根本没有谁能和他相比。“与他相似者”,就是和他一样的人。要说明的是“不存在”这一点。所谓“应当说明”,就是应当从《佛种姓》等经典中引出来说明。“声闻菩提有情即使十万个又怎能办到?”整句是这样连接的。以各种方式简择波罗蜜,所以叫“波罗蜜简择”,这是智慧。不过这种智慧并不是只在大菩提有情身上才生起,在独觉菩提有情和声闻菩提有情身上也会生起。为了说明正是这种智慧,是一切菩提有情获得授记的主要条件,所以说了“声闻菩提有情也……”等话。这里的“菩提”,指解脱智,这是圣道的名称。在菩提上执著的人,就叫“菩提有情”。“执著”的意思是:为了证得它而心志坚定。也可以说,为了菩提而修行的有情就是菩提有情。意思是说:即使在无佛的世间,他们也立足于“业自作”的智慧,寻求从轮回之苦中解脱的法。“资粮法”,指十种波罗蜜法。随顺轮回而行的人,叫“随顺轮回者”。就像大地上的尘土粉末一样,本性粗重的人,叫“凡夫”。大凡夫就叫“大凡夫”。他们既是随顺轮回者,又是大凡夫,所以合起来叫“随顺轮回大凡夫”。这是他们的状态。这种状态本身也叫他们的“地”。从义理上说,这其实就是对解脱法无所希求,也叫“无意愿”。“进入”,就是已经踏入。有三种决定者:菩提决定者、小入流决定者、圣入流决定者。其中,菩提决定者靠菩提资粮的力量成就;小入流决定者靠通达缘起的智慧力量成就;圣入流决定者靠入流道的智慧力量成就。这里指的是菩提决定者,所以说了“以一种方式”等话。意思是说:那两种菩提有情,如果没有波罗蜜简择智的成就,根本不可能获得授记,这是不用说的。
‘‘Atulo’’ti aññena so asadisoti vā, añño vātena sadisotassanatthītivā, - dvidhāpiattholabbhati. Sādhakagāthāyaṃ ‘‘paṭipuggalo’’ti yugaggāhīpuggalo. Kiñcāpi makkhali pūraṇādayo visuṃvisuṃ - ahaṃ sabbaññū sabbadassāvī - tica, ahaṃ sammāsambuddho-tica paṭijānantā yugaggāhino hutvā vicaranti. Dhammato pana sineru pabbata rājassa santike sakkhara kathalāniviyasampajjantīti. ‘‘Anacchariya’’nti natāva accharitabbaṃ hotīti attho. ‘‘Buddhabhūtassā’’ti buddhabhāvaṃ bhūtassapattassa. ‘‘Yaṃ buddha bhūtassa atulattaṃ, etaṃ anacchariya’’nti yojanā. Yadi cetaṃ anacchariyaṃ hoti, katamaṃ pana tāva acchariyaṃ bhavatīti āha ‘‘sampatijātassā’’tiādiṃ. Tattha ‘‘sampatijātassā’’ti ajjevajātassapi assa bhagavato. Kathaṃ atulatā paññāyatīti āha ‘‘tadāhī’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Ekaṅgaṇānī’’ti ekatalāni. Tadāhi bodhisattassapuññānubhāvena atimahanto obhāso pātubbhavati. = Uḷāro obhāso pāturahosi atikkammadevānaṃ devānubhāva=ntihi vuttaṃ. Tena obhāsena pharitā sabbe pathavi pabbatādayo jātiphalikakkhandhāviya suppasannā honti. Dasasahassa cakkavāḷāni ekatalaṃ hutvā paññāyanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anekāni cakkavāḷasahassāni ekaṅgaṇāni ahesu’’nti. ‘‘Paramāya pūjāyāti thutimaṅgalavacanapūjāya. ‘‘Lokassā’’ti sabba sattalokato. Evaṃ acchambhi vācaṃ nicchāresi dhammatāya sañcoditattāti adhippāyo. Tattha ‘‘acchambhivāca’’nti visāradavācaṃ. Āsabhiṃ vācantipi pāṭho. Uttamavācanti attho. ‘‘Nicchāresī’’ti udāharati. Idampi anacchariyaṃ, aññaṃ pitato acchariyataraṃ atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yadāpanā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Pāramitā guṇehi tena sadiso kocinattheva thapetvā aññe ca mahābodhi satteti adhippāyo . ‘‘Assā’’ti tena sadisassa. ‘‘Natthibhāvo dīpetabbo’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Dīpetabbo’’ti buddhavaṃsapāḷito āharitvā dīpetabbo. ‘‘Kutosāvakabodhisattānaṃ satasahassaṃ sakkhissatī’’ti yojanā. Pāramiyo pakārenavicinanti etenāti pāramipavicayo. Ñāṇaṃ. Taṃpanañāṇaṃ mahābodhisattānaṃ eva uppannaṃ nahoti. Paccekabodhisatta sāvakabodhisattānaṃpi uppannameva. Tadeva ca sabbesaṃpi bodhisattānaṃ niyatabyākaraṇappaṭilābhe padhānakāraṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘sāvakabodhisattāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bodhivuccativimokkhaññāṇaṃ. Ariyamaggassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Bodhimhisajanti laggantīti bodhisattā. ‘‘Laggantī’’ti tappaṭilābhatthāya niyata cittā hontīti attho. Bodhi atthāya paṭipannā sattā bodhisattātipi yujjati. Buddha suññepiloke kammassakatāñāṇe ṭhatvā vaṭṭadukkhato mokkhadhammapariyesino sattāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Sambhāra dhamme’’ti dasavidhe pārami dhamme. Vaṭṭaṃ anusaranti anugacchantīti vaṭṭānusārino. Pathaviyaṃ paṃsucuṇṇāni viya pakatiyā vaputhubhūtājanāti puthujjanā. Mahantāputhujjanāti mahāputhujjanā. Vaṭṭānusārino ca te mahāputhujjanācāti samāso. Tesaṃ bhāvoti viggaho. Ayaṃ bhāvoyeva tesaṃ bhūmīti ca vuccati. Atthato pana mokkhadhammanirapekkhatā eva. Acchandikatātipi vuccati. ‘‘Okkantā’’ti paviṭṭhā. Tayoniyatā, bodhisattaniyato ca cūḷasotāpannaniyato ca ariya sotāpannaniyato ca. Tattha bodhisattaniyato bodhisambhārabalena siddho. Cūḷasotāpanna niyato paccayākārānubodhaññāṇabalena. Ariyasotāpanna niyato sotāpatti maggaññāṇa balena. Tesu bodhisattaniyato idha adhippetoti vuttaṃ ‘‘ekena pariyāyenā’’tiādi. Vattabbamevanatthitesaṃ dvinnaṃ bodhisattānaṃ pārami pavicayaññāṇa sampattiyā vinā niyatabyākaraṇa lābhā saṅkāya eva abhāvatoti adhippāyo.
在《词成就考察》中,为了阐明而说:tulāya samito tulyo,意思是“因与秤相等而同等”。tulyo 本身通过省略 ya 音而成为 tulo。针对这一点,说“由于 ya 音省略的缘故”。又说,就在同一处:athavā samītatthe akārapaccayavasena tulāya samīto tulo,意思是“或者在等同义上,通过加 a 后缀,因与秤相等而成为 tulo”。针对这一点,说“由于 a 音省略的缘故”。其中,“tulāya”的意思是:在世间,以与执持之秤相似的慧。“samīto”的意思是:被作平等。因为 tula 这个词并非不适合存在,其意旨是:它确实适合。怎么知道呢?于是说“tulayituṃ”等。因为在那里,通过“不可被衡量”这一说法,显示它是业释。通过“正是业释”一语,即先前所说“tulayitabbo aññena saha pamitabboti tulo”——应被衡量、应与其他一起计量者,故为 tula,如此在这里所说的,正是以业释之义。由彼义成就故。“Tato”即从 tula 一词。思虑有什么用处?根本没有。这就是意旨。以说之习惯而说者,名为 vattā。vādī 即人。vattuno icchā vatticchā。也说 vattuṃ icchā vatticchā。随顺 vatticchā 的共许、约定、惯用语成就故,为复合词。“Etaṃ”即这由两种方式成就的说法。“Ce”即若说。“Na”即不合理。“Yathāsutaṃ”即如所闻的 tula。“Yuttaṃ”即依如所闻的规定而合理,排除不合理的。“Assutassa”即执持秤之同义词、阴性 tula 一词的,以及同样由 ya 音构成的 tulya 一词的不曾闻。于阴性中,从那里也有一个 a 音,如此作意,在等同义上的第二个 taddhita a 音也不曾闻,故不这样说。“Parikappanāya”即为思择而说。因无用处,故不合理,此为关联。Atulapadaṃ。
Padasiddhivicāreyaṃ vuttaṃ vibhāvaniyaṃ=tulāyasamitotulyo. Tulyo eva tuloyakāra lopavasenā=ti. Taṃsandhāya ‘‘ya kārassavāvasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yañcavuttaṃ tattheva=athavāsamītatthe akārapaccayavasena tulāyasamītotulo=ti. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘akārassavāvasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘tulāyā’’ti loke dhāraṇatulāsadisāya paññāyāti attho. ‘‘Samīto’’ti samaṃ kato. Nahi tulasaddo bhavituṃ nayutto. Yutto evāti adhippāyo. Kathaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘tulayitu’’ntiādiṃ. Tatthahi ‘‘tulayituṃ asakkuṇeyyo’’tivacanena tassakammasādhanattaṃdasseti. ‘‘Kammasādhanenevā’’ti pubbe-tulayitabbo aññena saha pamitabboti tuloti evaṃ idhavuttena kamma sādhana vacanattheneva. ‘‘Tadatthasiddhito’’ti tassa vibhāvaniyaṃ vuttassa duvidhassa atthassa siddhito. ‘‘Tato’’ti tulasaddato. Cintāya kiṃ payojanaṃ atthi. Natthiyevāti adhippāyo. Vadati sīlenāti vattā. Vādī puggalo. Vattuno icchāvatticchā. Vattuṃ icchāvatticchātipivadanti. Vatticchaṃ anugato sammuti saṅketavohāra siddhattāti samāso. ‘‘Eta’’nti etaṃ dvidhāsiddhavacanaṃ. ‘‘Ce’’ti cevadeyya. ‘‘Nā’’ti nayuttaṃ. ‘‘Yathāsuta’’nti tula iti sutaṃ. ‘‘Yutta’’nti yathāsuta niyāmeneva yuttaṃ vajjetvā. ‘‘Assutassā’’ti dhāraṇatulāpariyāyassa itthiliṅgatulāsaddassa. Tatoyevayakāra yuttassatulyasaddassa ca assutassa. Itthiliṅgesati, tatopi eko akāroti katvā samītatthe dutīyo taddhita akāropi assutoyevanāmahoti. ‘‘Parikappanāyā’’ti parikappetvā kathanāya. Payojanābhāvato na yuttantisambandho. Atulapadaṃ.
6这样解释了这两个词的词义之后,现在要对他们作义摄的解释,于是说“然而,以这些……”等。其中,“成就”就是具足、圆满。“名为菩提资粮的积集”,就是三十种波罗蜜的圆满。“大金刚智”,也是指世尊的漏尽智。在这个智的前分阶段,为了成佛而以随顺法观智的力量,每天修习三十六俱胝十万行相的执取果报等至的前分观智,也被称为“大金刚智”。这一切都在《大复注》中说过。“大菩提的”,是指被称为一切知佛之正觉的上道智。应舍断的法由此而被舍断,所以叫舍断;或者,由此而舍断应舍断的法,所以叫舍断——这样理解之后,那上道智以及那观智也被称为“舍断”,出于这个意趣,所以说“或者,它也包含在舍断成就中”。五戒。就像在“杀生的舍断戒、离戒、心戒、律仪戒、不违犯戒”等当中一样,这里名为“舍断戒”的,按上面所说的意义,其实只契合“离戒”。但是,如果认为“名为舍断的法并不存在”,那就应当以“有舍断”为首,把能成就舍断的那两种智,权称为“舍断”。否则,“舍断成就”就会变成没有实质、没有果报。独觉佛和佛的声闻虽然也舍断烦恼,但因为不是连同习气一起舍断,心相续中还有痴的习气存在,所以达不到一切知的状态。因此,他们的烦恼舍断不叫舍断成就。不像一切知佛那样,所以说“连同习气……”等。应当先说观智成就,再说舍断成就。但在《复注》中,先说舍断成就,其次说证得成就,再说智成就。在舍断成就中显示了上道智;在证得成就中说了获得一切智智;在智成就中,则以那两种智显示了其余的十力智等一切智。这里也是随顺《复注》的理路,所以说“然而,正是舍断成就……”等。“一切智智的近因”,就是一切智智的近因,是逼近的因。“因为除了道智之外,没有名为舍断成就的”,其究竟意趣是:胜义上不存在。这也是因为《清净道论》中说——“除了所说的杀生等不生起之外,名为舍断的法根本没有别的”——所以才这样说。然而,由于受持舍断之法,应舍断之法的不生起,就叫作“唯一趣向涅槃法”。也就是“一寂灭句”。所以《无碍解道》中说:“生是怖畏,不生是安稳,于寂灭句有智;转起是怖畏,不转起是安稳,于寂灭句有智。”分舍断就是分不生起,镇伏舍断就是镇伏不生起,正断舍断就是正断不生起,应当这样说。这里则是把能导致不生起的观智和道智,权称为“舍断”。为什么?应当知道,是因为它们是上位智成就等的缘。“成就杂乱”,就是成就破坏、成就混杂。“随正理而来”,就是依正理而来。“以戒等德”,就是以戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱智见这些德。“以神足法”,就是以神变等神足之德。“以相与随好庄严”,就是以三十二大丈夫相和八十随好庄严。“意趣”,就是安立在心相续中的殊胜欲望。“意乐”,就是无贪意乐等意乐。“殊胜”,就是微妙。“利益意乐”,就是想要利益。诸根未熟有情的根熟之时到来,这里也应当说明。“已证知”,就是极其显著。“二种舍断成就”,就是二种舍断成就和智成就。在正等觉这个词中。“自己觉悟诸谛”,这里取的是被称为正觉的上道智。而它以舍断为先行作用。“于彼证得一切智”,这里是一切智智。“于力得自在”,这里取的是十力智。所以说“二种……中略……由正等觉一词所阐明”。
6. Evaṃ dvinnaṃ padānaṃ padattha saṃvaṇṇanaṃ katvā idāni tesaṃyeva atthuddhārasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ karonto ‘‘imehi panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘sampadā’’ti sampattiyo. ‘‘Bodhisambhārasambharaṇaṃ nāma’’ samatiṃ sapāramīnaṃ paripūraṇaṃ. ‘‘Mahāvajiraññāṇa’’nti bhagavato āsavakkhayaññāṇampi vuccati. Tassa pubbabhāge buddhabhāvatthāya anupadadhammavipassanāvasena chattiṃsa koṭi satasahassa saṅkhānaṃ devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakapphalasamāpattīnaṃ pubbabhāga vipassanāñāṇampi mahāvajiraññāṇanti vuccati. Sabbampetaṃ mahāṭīkāyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Mahābodhiyā’’ti sabbaññu buddhānaṃ abhisambodhi saṅkhātassa aggamaggaññāṇassa. Pahiyyanti pahātabbā dhammā etenāti pahānaṃ. Pajahanti pahātabbedhammeetenātivā pahānanti katvā taṃ aggamaggaññāṇampitaṃ vipassanāñāṇampi pahānanti vuccatīti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘pahānasampadāyaṃ vā sā saṅgahitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pañcasīlāni. Pāṇātipātassa pahānaṃsīlaṃ, veramaṇisīlaṃ, cetasikaṃsīlaṃ, saṃvarosīlaṃ, avītikkamosilantiādīsuviya etthahi pahānasīlaṃ nāma yathā vuttena atthena veramaṇisīlamevāti yujjati. Pahānaṃ nāma kocidhammo nahotīti adhippāye pana satipahāna sīsena pahānasādhakaṃ tadevañāṇadvayaṃ upacārenapahānanti gahetabbaṃ. Itarathā pahānasampadā nāma asārā aphalāti āpajjeyyāti. Paccekabuddha buddhasāvakā kilese pajahantāpi vāsanāya saha appajahanato citta santāne mohavāsanāya vijjamānattā sabbaññu bhāvaṃ nagacchanti. Tasmā yathātesaṃ kilesappahānaṃ pahānasampadā nāma nahoti. Natathāsabbaññubuddhānanti āha ‘‘sahavāsanāyā’’tiādiṃ. Vibhāvaniyaṃñāṇasampadā pathamaṃ vuttā. Tato pahāna sampadā. Ṭīkāyaṃ pana pahānasampadā pathamaṃ vuttā. Tato adhigama sampadānāma vuttā. Tato ñāṇasampadā. Pahānasampadāyañca aggamaggaññāṇaṃ dassitaṃ. Adhigama sampadāti ca sabbaññutaññāṇappaṭilābho vutto. Ñāṇasampadāyampana tehi dvīhi ñāṇehi avasesānidasabalaññāṇādīnisabbaññāṇānidassitāni. Idhapi ṭīkānayameva sambhāvento ‘‘pahānasampadāyevapanā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Sabbaññutaññāṇappadaṭṭhāna’’nti sabbaññutaññāṇassapadaṭṭhānaṃ, āsanna kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Na hi maggaññāṇato aññā pahānasampadānāma atthi’’. Paramatthato natthīti adhippāyo. Idañca visuddhimagge=pahānanti koci dhammonāma natthi aññatra vuttappakārānaṃ pāṇātipātādīnaṃ anuppādamattato=ti āgatattā vuttaṃ. Pahāyakadhammasamādānena pana pahātabba dhammānaṃ anuppādo nāma ekopaṇīta dhammohoti. Ekaṃ santi padaṃ hoti. Tathāhi vuttaṃ paṭisambhidā magge=uppādo bhayaṃ , anuppādo khemanti santipade ñāṇaṃ. Pavatti bhayaṃ, appavatti khemanti santipadeñāṇa=nti. Tadaṅgappahānaṃ panatadaṅgaanuppādo nāma. Vikkhambhanappahānaṃ vikkhambhana anuppādo nāma. Samucchedappahānaṃ samuccheda anuppādo nāmāti vattabbaṃ. Idha pana anuppāda sampāpakaṃ vipassanā ñāṇañca maggaññāṇañca upacārena pahānanti adhippetaṃ. Kasmā, upariñāṇa sampadādīnaṃ paccayattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Sampadāsaṅkaro’’ti sampadāsambhedo, sampadāsammisso. ‘‘Ñāyāgata’’nti yuttito āgataṃ. ‘‘Sīlādiguṇehī’’ti sīla samādhi paññā vimutti vimuttiññāṇadassana guṇehi. ‘‘Iddhidhammehī’’ti iddhividhābhiññādīhi iddhiguṇehi. ‘‘Lakkhaṇānubyañjanappaṭimaṇḍitassā’’ti dvattiṃsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇehi ca asīti khuddakalakkhaṇehi ca paṭimaṇḍitassa. ‘‘Āsayo’’ti citta santāne adhisayito icchāviseso. ‘‘Ajjhāsayassā’’ti alobhajjhāsayādikassaajjhāsayassa. ‘‘Uḷāratā’’ti paṇītatā. ‘‘Hitajjhāsayatā’’tihitakāmatā. Aparipāka gatindriyānaṃ sattānaṃ indriyaparipākakālāgamanañca ettha vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Abhiññātāna’’nti atipākaṭānaṃ. ‘‘Dvepahānasampadā’’ti dvepahāna sampadā ñāṇasampadā. Sammāsambuddhapade. ‘‘Sāmaṃ saccāni abhisambujjhī’’ti ettha abhisambodhisaṅkhātaṃ aggamaggaññāṇaṃ gahitaṃ. Tañca pahānakiccappadhānaṃ hoti. ‘‘Tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ patto’’ti ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. ‘‘Balesu ca vasibhāva’’nti ettha dasabalaññāṇāni gahitāni. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dve…pe… sammāsambuddhapadenavibhāvitā’’ti.
77. 关于“与正法及最上僧团共俱”这一句。就像在“我将敬礼与僧团共俱的世间导师”这句话里,因为“共俱(saha)”一词有集合的含义,所以可以理解为“我将敬礼世间导师和僧团”,这样集合的意思就能被理解。这里“我将敬礼(namassissaṃ)”表达的是“我敬礼了(namassiṃ)”的意思。同样地,在这里为了表明“我敬礼正自觉者、正法以及最上僧团”这一行为的集合义是由“共俱”一词所表达的,所以说了“从远处……(中略)……应当这样看待此句”。“此”指的就是“与正法及最上僧团共俱”这个词句。这里,“集合(samavāyo)”是指两个、三个或许多事物在同一实体、同一属性或同一行为中无间隔地依止、现起。在追悔、随喜等处,“我曾施与布施,我曾守护戒律”、“我流转于种种生死的轮回”等,即使在过去时也使用未来时的说法,因此说“我将敬礼(namassissaṃ)”是“我敬礼了(namassiṃ)”的意思。“诸具德者(guṇībhūtānaṃ)”是指在复合词中作为修饰成分的、非主要的。在此处,这个“ī”表示“变成那样(abbhūtatabbhāva)”。例如,“乌鸦变成白色”、“鹭变成黑色”。这里,“变成白色”是指先前不是白色的变成白色。“变成黑色”是指先前不是黑色的变成黑色。此处也是如此。在“礼敬佛、法及僧”等中,由于各自分别主要,所以即使是非具德的法与僧,在此复合词中也成为其他词义的具德者。这叫做“变成那样之状态(abbhūtatabbhāvavattho)”。若说“已礼敬之状态(abhivāditabhāvo)”,由于“ta”后缀多用于过去时,所以在先前经文的开头时,法与僧对长老的礼敬也被显示为成立。若说“应礼敬之状态(abhivādetabbabhāvo)”,由于“tabba”后缀适用于一般时,则不像那样显示。如“布施应施与、戒律应守护”等中,法与僧也应一切时礼敬。这样,法与僧一切时都应礼敬的功德就被显示了。为了表明这个意思,说了“在那里(tatthā)”等。其中,“礼敬(abhivādanaṃ)”一词是从显示行为集合的角度说的。然而,它并不显示时间差别。“以自己的示现(attano nidassanena)”是指带着儿子和妻子前来,以自己的方式引出并示现的运用。那个运用确实是行为的集合,不是属性的集合。在这里,长老的礼敬语中,长老以这些词通过三宝之门而礼敬,如此理解后,在“我礼敬(abhivādiyā)”中,也引出“我礼敬(abhivādiyādhī)”的意思。然而,对于非主要的行为词,不能引出那个意思,所以说了“然而(apicā)”等。其中,“然而(apicā)”是在说明“有少许应说之义”时,这个虚词组合。“以经的承诺(ganthappaṭiññāyā)”是指以经的承诺之语。“结合(sahaghaṭetvā)”是指结合在一起。
7. Sasaddhammagaṇuttamapade. Yathā=sasaṅghaṃlokanāyakaṃ namassissaṃ=ti etthasahasaddassa samavāyatthattā ahaṃlokanāyakañca saṅghañca namassissanti evaṃ samavāyattho viññāyati. Tathā idhapi sammāsambuddhañcasaddhammañca gaṇuttamañca abhivādiyāmīti evaṃ kiriyāsamavāyattho sahasaddena dīpitoti dassetuṃ ‘‘dūratohaṃ…pe… evamidaṃ daṭṭhabba’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ida’’nti sasaddhammagaṇuttamapadaṃ. Ettha ca‘‘samavāyo’’ti dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ bahūnaṃ vā atthānaṃ ekasmiṃ dabbevā guṇevākiriyāyavāsamaṃ avecca ayanaṃpavattanaṃ samavāyo. Paccānutāpa paccānumodanādiṭhānesu=ahaṃ pubbedānaṃ nadadissaṃ, sīlaṃ narakkhissaṃ. - Anekajāti saṃsāraṃ sandhāvissa=ntiādinā atītepikāle anāgatavacanaṃ payujjatīti āha ‘‘namassissa’’nti namassiṃti. ‘‘Guṇībhūtāna’’nti samāsapade visesanabhūtānaṃ, appadhānabhūtānanti attho. Abbhūta tabbhāvecāyaṃ īkāro. Yathā, kāko setī bhavati, bako kaṇhībhavatīti. Ettha ca ‘‘setī bhavatī’’ti asetapubbo setobhavati. ‘‘Kaṇhībhavatī’’ti akaṇhapubbo kaṇhobhavatīti attho. Tathā idhapi. Buddhaṃ dhammañca saṅghañcavanditvā-tiādīsu visuṃvisuṃ padhānattā aguṇabhūtāpi dhammasaṅghā idhasamāsapade aññapadatthassaguṇabhūtāhonti. Ayaṃ abbhūtatabbhāvattho nāma. ‘‘Abhivāditabhāvo’’ti vutte tapaccayassa bahulaṃ atītakālavisayattā pubbeganthārambhakāle dhamma saṅghānaṃpi therassa vandanāsiddhi dassitā hoti. ‘‘Abhivādetabba bhāvo’’ti vuttepana tabbapaccayassakālasāmaññavisayattāna tathā dassitā hoti. Dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, sīlaṃ rakkhitabbantiādīsu viya dhammasaṅghānāmasabbakālaṃpi abhivādetabbāti. Evaṃ dhammasaṅghānaṃ sabbakālaṃpi abhivādanārahaguṇo eva dassitoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha, ‘‘abhivādana’’nti idaṃ kiriyāsamavāyadassanato vuttaṃ. Kālavisesaṃ pana nadīpetiyeva. ‘‘Attano nidassanenā’’ti saputtadāro āgatoti attanā nīharitvā dassitena payogena. Sohi payogo kiriyā samavāyasseva. Naguṇasamavāyassāti. Ettha ca therassa vandanāvacane thero imehi yevapadehi ratanattayaṃtīhidvāre hivandatīti gahetvā ‘‘abhivādiyā’’ti ettha abhivādiyādhīti ca atthaṃ nīharanti. Appadhāna kiriyāpade pana tadattha nīharaṇaṃ asambhāvento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘apicā’’ti kiñci vattabbaṃ atthīti atthajotane ayaṃ nipātasamudayo. ‘‘Ganthappaṭiññāyā’’ti ganthappaṭiññāvacanena. ‘‘Sahaghaṭetvā’’ti ekato sambandhitvā.
在词义解释中,像“有财之人”“拥有财富之人”这类复合词和派生词,大多数都是用来表达殊胜义的。因为人们不会用这些词来称呼只有少量财富的人。所以,这里也是为了显示这种殊胜义,才说“以自己化作的……(中略)……作为皈依处的”。其中,“以自己化作的”是指由自己产生的。通过“因为不是……”等语句,正是从否定的角度阐明这个意思。其中,“由他人化作的”,意图是指由佛陀化作的。“如此的称赞”,是指“与正法及最上僧团共俱”这一称赞。“此也”中的“也”字,是为了把第二个意思也一并收进来。关联是这样的:并非只是前两个词才是世尊不共的功德词,这个词同样也是世尊与独觉佛等不共的功德词。
Vacanatthe . Sadhano puriso, dhanavāpuriso-ti ādayo samāsataddhitasaddā yebhūyyena atissayattha dīpakā honti. Nahi appakena dhanena tathā voharanti. Tasmā idhāpi tathā rūpaṃ atissayatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘attanānimmitena…pe… saraṇabhūtenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha, ‘‘attanānimmitenā’’ti attanā uppāditena. ‘‘Nahī’’tiādinā tadatthameva byatirekato vivarati. Tattha, ‘‘paranimmitenā’’ti buddhanimmitenāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Tathā thomana’’nti sasaddhamma gaṇuttamanti thomanaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃpī’’ti dutīyattha sampiṇḍane ayaṃpikāro. Nakevalaṃ purimapadadvayameva satthu asādhāraṇaguṇapadaṃ hoti. Atha kho idaṃpi padaṃ satthu paccekabuddhādīhi asādhāraṇa padamevahotīti yojanā.
关于法的词义。“持”就是承载。在偈颂里,“保护”是指保护众生免于恶趣等痛苦。“那些”指烦恼。“在这个意义上”,是指在断除烦恼这种“持”的含义上。为什么说“涅槃从直接义来说名为法”呢?难道出离断不就是涅槃的作用,而这个才是正断吗?为了回应这个质难,所以说“圣道……”等。“与涅槃同在”的意思是:把作为所缘增上和所缘亲依止的涅槃,作为自身的立足处。另外,正断和出离在意义上其实属于同一类。因此,应当把出离也看作主要的“持”。或者说,出离本身就是最主要的“持”,这样也说得通。“那只是持的方法”,这不是主要的“持”。为什么呢?因为它没有正断的作用。“这五种也只是间接意义上的法”。为什么呢?因为在正断的作用上,诸道如果离开涅槃,就无法独立成办。这里说的“沙门果”:沙门的状态叫沙门性,这是圣道的名称;沙门性之果就是沙门果。在第二种解释中,即使不是直接作用的缘,就像药缘一样,处于业格也能表示作用缘的意义,正如“所见、所闻、所觉、所识”被称为“值得持守的”。“即如所说的法”,就是指五种主要法、五种间接法。“某些”指四种道;再一处“某些”仅指涅槃——因为落入复数的读诵中,这里用了复数。又一处“某些”指四种沙门果法;又“某些”指教理之法——这里的复数也只是随读诵而来。“持者”指持法的人。在第三种解释中,“承载着不坠落者”就是令其不坠落而承载。在第四种解释中,“于此”指于此法中。“以法为洲者,称为法洲”;“以法为依归者,称为法依归”——“诸比丘,你们要以法为洲、以法为依归、不以他者为依归”,这是从三个方面说的。“获得立足处者,称为已得立足处”,这也是合理的,其意趣是随顺“法洲”的读法。在辨析法义时,问难者把行道之法看作有别于那十种法,所以用“为什么”等来质难。然而那行道之法并不异于圣道,它就含摄在其中——为了显示这个意思,所以说“它也……”等。“它是道的前分行道”:就像芒果树作为芒果花、芒果果的立足处,是花果的前分依处;为什么呢?因为花果正是从它生出、正是依它而增长。同样,行道之法也作为圣道果的立足处,而成为前分亲依止之行道。为什么呢?因为圣道果正是从它生出、正是依它而增长。这在《相应部·大品》中也说过:“诸比丘,凡任何种子聚、草木聚获得增长、增大、广大,一切都是依于大地、住立于大地;同样,诸比丘,比丘依于戒、住立于戒而修习八圣道,便在诸法上获得增长、增大、广大。”“如同布施中的前思”:正如把福说为三种——布施所成之福、持戒所成之福、修习所成之福——时,从寻求布施之物开始、缘布施而转起的一切前分之思,都被摄入“布施”一词中,全归为“布施”;同样,那行道之法也就这样被摄入“圣道”一词中,全归为“圣道”,这就是所说的意思。
Dhammavacanatthe. ‘‘Dhāretī’’ti vahati. Gāthāyaṃ ‘‘rakkhatī’’ti apāyādidukkhatorakkhati. ‘‘Yesa’’nti kilesānaṃ. ‘‘Imasmiṃ atthe’’ti kilesasamucchindanasaṅkhāte dhāraṇatthe. ‘‘Nibbānañcanippariyāyato dhammo nāmā’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu nissaraṇappahānameva nibbānassa kiccaṃ, idañca samucchedappahānanti codanaṃ pariharanto ‘‘ariyamaggāhī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Nibbānena saheva hutvā’’ti ārammaṇādhipatibhūtaṃ ārammaṇū panissayabhūtañca nibbānaṃ attano patiṭṭhaṃ katvāti adhippāyo. Apica, samucchedoti ca nissaraṇanti ca atthato samānagatikaṃ hoti. Tasmā nissaraṇaṃpi mukhyadhāraṇa mevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nissaraṇamevavā padhānadhāraṇanti piyujjatiyeva. ‘‘Dhāraṇūpāyoyevahoti’’. Namukhyadhāraṇaṃ. Kasmā, samuccheda kiccābhāvato. ‘‘Etepañca pariyāyadhammāyeva’’. Kasmā, nibbānassaviyamaggānaṃ samuccheda kicce asahāyattāti. Ettha ca ‘‘sāmaññapphalānī’’ti samaṇassa bhāvo sāmaññaṃ. Ariyamaggassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sāmaññassaphalaṃ sāmaññapphalaṃ. Dutīyavikappe akicca paccayabhūtāpi kecikitakapaccayā kammatthegatā kiccapaccayānaṃpi atthaṃ dīpeti. Yathā, diṭṭhaṃ, sutaṃ, mutaṃ, viññātanti vuttaṃ ‘‘dhāraṇāraho’’ti. ‘‘Yathā vutta dhammā yevā’’ti pañcamukhyadhammā, pañcapariyāyadhammāyeva. ‘‘Kecī’’ti cattāro maggā. Puna ‘‘kecī’’ti nibbānameva. Bahuvacana sotepatitattā ettha bahuvacanaṃ ruḷaṃ. Puna ‘‘kecī’’ti cattāro sāmaññapphala dhammā. ‘‘Kecī’’ti pariyatti dhammo. Etthāpi bahuvacanaṃ sotapatitameva. ‘‘Dhārenta’’nti dhārentaṃ puggalaṃ. Tatīya vikappe ‘‘apatamānaṃ vahantī’’ti apatamānaṃ katvā vahanti. Catuttha vikappe ‘‘etthā’’ti etasmiṃ dhamme. Dhammovadīpaṃ etesanti dhammadīpā. Dhammova paṭisaraṇaṃ etesanti dhammappaṭisaraṇā. Dhammadīpā bhikkhave bhavatha dhammappaṭisaraṇā, anaññappaṭisaraṇā tihi vuttaṃ. Laddhā patiṭṭhā etesanti laddhappatiṭṭhā. Yujjatiyeva. Dhammadīpapāṭhānulomattāti adhippāyo. Dhammavicāraṇāyaṃ, codakopaṭipatti dhammaṃ dasavidha dhammato aññaṃmaññamāno ‘‘kasmā’’tiādinā codeti. So pana paṭipatti dhammo tato aññona hoti, tattheva antogadhoti dassento ‘‘sopanā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Maggassa pubbabhāgappaṭipadā hotī’’ti yathā ambarukkho ambapupphaambapphalassa patiṭṭhā bhāvena pubbabhāga nissayo hoti. Kasmā, itoyevatassa pupphapphalassa jātattā etthevasaṃ vaḍḍhitattā ca. Tathā paṭipatti dhammopi ariyamaggapphalassapatiṭṭhābhāvena pubbabhāgūpanissayappaṭipadāhoti. Kasmā, itoyeva tassajātattā etthevasaṃ vaḍḍhitattā ca. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvagga saṃyutte. Seyyathāpi bhikkhave yekeci mebījagāmabhūtagāmāvuḍḍhiṃ viruḷiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjanti. Sabbete pathaviṃ nissāya pathaviṃ patiṭṭhāya. Evameva kho bhikkhave bhikkhusīlaṃ nissāya sīlepatiṭṭhāya ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgīkaṃ maggaṃ bhāvento vuḍḍhiṃ viruḷhiṃ vepullaṃ pāpuṇāti dhammesūti. ‘‘Pubbacetanāviyadāne’’ti yathā tividhaṃ puññaṃ, dānamayaṃ puññaṃ sīlamayaṃ puññaṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ puññanti vutte dānavatthu pariyesanato paṭṭhāya dānaṃ ārabbhapavattā sabbā pubbabhāga cetanā dānavacane saṅgahitā dānantveva saṅkhyaṃgatā. Evaṃ so paṭipatti dhammo ariya maggavacane evasaṅgahito, ariyamaggo tveva saṅkhyaṃ gatoti vuttaṃ hoti.
在解释这个法义关联时,为了进一步说明,他又说了“再者”等话。其中,“以何因缘部分”的意思是:以某个因缘部分,也就是以“持的方法”等所说的因缘部分。值得礼敬,因为值得敬礼,所以叫应礼敬者。对于那位应礼敬者。“凡夫善人”这里,善人有三种:律善人、经善人、论善人。其中,具足律中所制定的善行的比丘,就叫律善人。这里应当理解为:比丘以巴帝摩卡律仪防护而住,具足正行与行处,对微细的过失也见到怖畏,受持学处而修学。其中,律中所制定的善行有两种:初梵行戒和增上行仪戒。其中,包含在二部分别中的戒,叫初梵行戒;包含在犍度中的戒,叫增上行仪戒。
Imasmiṃ dhammasaṃsandane aparampi vattabbaṃ vadanto ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘yadaggenā’’ti yenakāraṇakoṭṭhāsena dhāraṇūpāyotiādinā kāraṇabhāgenāti attho. Vandanaṃ araha tīti vandaneyyo. Tasmiṃ vandaneyye. ‘‘Puthujjanakalyāṇako’’ti ettha tividho kalyāṇako vinayakalyāṇako suttantakalyāṇako abhidhammakalyāṇakoti. Tattha vinaye paññattāya kalyāṇappaṭipattiyā samannāgato bhikkhu vinayakalyāṇako nāma. So idha bhikkhu pātimokkha saṃvarasaṃvuto viharati ācāra gocara sampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti ettha veditabbo. Tattha vinaye paññattākalyāṇappaṭipattiduvidhā, ādi brahmacariyakasīlaṃ abhisamacārikasīlanti. Tattha, ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannaṃ sīlaṃ ādibrahmacariyakaṃ nāma. Khandhakapariyāpannaṃ sīlaṃ abhisamacārikaṃ nāma.
在诸经中说的善行道,无论在家或出家,具足它的人就叫做“经善者”。比丘们,圣弟子具足四法,就已超越一切恶趣的怖畏。是哪四法呢?比丘们,在这里,圣弟子对佛具足不动净信:“彼世尊是阿拉汉、正自觉者……天人师、佛、世尊。”对法具足不动净信:“法由世尊善说……智者应各自证知。”对僧具足不动净信:“世尊的声闻僧团善行道……是世间无上福田。”具足圣者所喜爱的诸戒——这一点应当了知。其中,“对佛的不动净信”,是指与了知“阿拉汉、正自觉者”等功德句义的智相应的净信。“圣者所喜爱”,是指被圣者所欲求、所珍爱,所以叫圣者所喜爱。这是指极清净的活命第八戒。比丘们,这四法是预流支。是哪四法呢?亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、法随法行——与此相关的众多经典,在这里应当广说。
Suttantesu vuttāya kalyāṇappaṭipattiyā samannāgato gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā suttanta kalyāṇako nāma. So catūhi bhikkhave dhammehi samannāgato ariyasāvako sabbaṃ duggatibhayaṃ samatikkanto hoti. Katamehi catūhi. Idha bhikkhave ariyasāvako buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti iti piso bhagavā…pe… satthādevamanussānaṃ, buddho, bhagavāti. Dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo…pe… paccattaṃ veditabbo viññūhīti. Saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho…pe… anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassāti. Ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgato hotīti ettha veditabbo. Tattha buddhe aveccappasādo nāma arahaṃ, sammāsambuddho, tiādikānaṃ guṇapadānaṃ attha jānanaññāṇena yutto pasādo. Ariyehikāmīyanti icchīyantīti ariyakantāni. Suparisuddhassa ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Cattārimāni bhikkhave sotāpattiyaṅgāni. Katamāni cattāri. Sappurisasaṃsevo, saddhammassavanaṃ, yoniso manasikāro, dhammānu dhammappaṭipattītiādīni bahūni suttantāni idha vattabbāni.
在阿毗达摩或诸经中说的善行道,不论在家或出家,具足它的人就叫做“阿毗达摩善者”。这里应当知道,他就是多闻的圣弟子,已见诸圣者,善解圣法,在圣法中得到调伏,不把色看作我。其中,“多闻”是指对蕴、处、界、缘起、念处等具足学习、询问和抉择智的在家或出家者,在诸注疏中被称为“多闻者”。他就被称为“凡夫善者”。
Abhidhamme vā suttantesu vā vuttāya kalyāṇappaṭipattiyā samannāgatogahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā abhidhammakalyāṇako nāma. So idha sutavā ariyasāvako ariyānaṃ dassāvī ariya dhammassakovido ariyadhammesu vinīto. So rūpaṃ attato na samanupassatīti ettha veditabbo. Tattha, ‘‘sutavā’’ti ettha khandhā, yatana, dhātu, paṭiccasamuppāda, satipaṭṭhānā, dīsu uggaha paripucchā vinicchayaññāṇa samannāgato gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā suta vā nāmāti aṭṭhakathāsu vutto. So eva puthujjana kalyāṇakoti ca vuccati.
太阳族的佛陀说过,凡夫有两种。
凡夫有两种:一种是盲凡夫,一种是善凡夫。
Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano. ti
此外,已经说过了。不过在《增支部》第四集中这样问:什么样的人是“少闻而凭听闻有所得”?这里有一种人,他听法,哪怕只是听一首四句偈,也能了知其中的义理、了知其中的法,成为随法而行的人。这样的人就叫“少闻而凭听闻有所得”。这里说的“多闻”和“凭听闻有所得”,在意义上其实是一回事。凡夫中的善者,在僧团中被归入有学众。就像《附随》里说的:“谁在学?”——凡夫善者和七种圣者都在学,而漏已尽的阿罗汉则是“已学”。然而在《分别经》的义注中又说:已皈依三宝的优婆塞,也被归入为证得入流果而修行的人之中。其中,所谓“为证得入流果而修行的人”,就是住于入流道上的圣者。“他也被归入其中”,这是连接。 “至此已被拒绝”,这是连接。“在僧团中不被归入”,是指虽然在“我皈依僧”“世尊的弟子僧团是善行者”等文句中出现“僧”这个词,但不被归入其中。“对于不皈依者,皈依不能成立”,这是为了说明在“我皈依僧”这一“僧”的说法中,那个人不被归入的理由。因此说“那已被拒绝”。如果他不指向整个世尊的弟子僧团,而只是皈依某一个人说“我皈依尊者”,那么皈依就不成立。如果他指向整个世尊的弟子僧团,在其面前皈依说“我皈依僧”,那就成立。这是就幼年时最初的皈依而言说的。因为这种皈依,一旦受持之后,只要不放弃对三宝的信仰,即使尽形寿也不会破坏。不需要一再受持。即使一再受持也没有过失。一再受持则福德增长。在最初受持之时,由于是别人给予的,所以不算获得;由自己口中说出,才算获得。因此,不先在别人面前受持,而是自己口中说出,在家人的皈依就成立。同样,一切在家戒也是如此。沙弥的皈依则只能从比丘等那里获得。而且应当知道,这只有在双方都具备条件的情况下才行。“Vo”是“你们的”意思。“法与律已由我宣说、制定”。“在我灭度后”即“我超越之后”。意思是说“我般涅槃后”。“大师将存在”,这是句子的剩余部分。“已称赞”即“极为称赞、赞叹”。“住于善行中者”即住于三种善行中的某一种。“不住者”即完全远离一切善行、具恶戒、恶法者,这是意趣所在。特别是,这里应当知道,毗奈耶行才是主要的。“他”即那个具恶戒、恶法者。连自己都不能成为皈依处,他必定趣向恶趣,这是意趣所在。“皈依从何而来”,这是连接。在“无数千经中”,在毗奈耶中也可见许多呵责经句,在经藏中也有。特别是在《火蕴譬喻经》等中。
Ca vuttaṃ. Aṅguttare pana catukkanipāte katamo puggalo appassuto sutena upapanno hoti. Idhekacco dhammaṃ suṇāti ekāyapi cātuppadikāya gāthāya attha maññāya dhamma maññāya dhammā nu dhammappaṭipanno hoti. Ayaṃ appassutosutena upapannoti vuttaṃ. Sutavāti ca sutena upapannoti ca atthato ekanti. Puthujjana kalyāṇako saṅghe sekkhesusaṅgahito. Vuttaṃhetaṃ parivāre ke sikkhantīti. Puthujjana kalyāṇakena saddhiṃ satta ariyapuggalā sikkhanti. Arahā khīṇāsavo sikkhitasikkhoti. Dakkhiṇa vibhaṅgasutta aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana. Ti saraṇa saraṇaṃ gato upāsakopi sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne saṅgahitoti vuttaṃ. Tattha, sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannonāma sotāpatti maggaṭṭho ariyapuggalo. ‘‘Sohisaṅgahito’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Ettāvatā paṭikkhittaṃ hotī’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Saṅghe asaṅgahito’’ti saṅghaṃsaraṇaṃ gacchāmīti ca, suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅghoti ca, evarūpesu ṭhānesu āgate saṅgha vacane asaṅgahito. ‘‘Na hitaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchantassasaraṇagamanaṃ sampajjatī’’ti idaṃ saṅghaṃsaraṇaṃ gacchāmīti ettha saṅgha vacanetassapuggalassa asaṅgahita bhāvasādhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ paṭikkhittaṃ hotī’’ti. Sace pana sabbaṃ bhagavato sāvakasaṅghaṃ anuddhissatameva puggalaṃ saṅghaṃsaraṇaṃ gaccheyya āyasmantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti. Saraṇa gamanaṃ na sampajjatiyeva. Atha sabbaṃ bhagavato sāvakasaṅghaṃ uddissa tassa santike saraṇaṃ gaccheyya saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti. Sampajjatiyeva . Idañca daharakāle sabbappathamaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Idañhi saraṇa gamanaṃ nāma sakiṃ gahetvā ratanattaye saddhaṃ ajahantassa yāvajīvaṃpi na bhijjati. Punappunaṃ gahaṇa kiccaṃ natthi. Punappunaṃ gaṇhantepi dosonatthi. Punappunaṃ puññaṃ vaḍḍhati. Sabbappathamaṃ gahaṇakāle ca aññena dinnattā laddhaṃ nahoti. Attanovacī bhedena laddhaṃ hoti. Tasmā aññassa santike aggahetvā sayameva vacībhedaṃ gaṇhantassa gahaṭṭhassa saraṇa gamanaṃ sampajjatiyeva. Tathā sabbāni gahaṭṭhasīlānīti. Sāmaṇera saraṇa gamanampana bhikkhunādinnameva labbhati. Tañca kho ubhinnaṃpiṭhānakaraṇa sampattiyā sati evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Vo’’ti tumhākaṃ. Yodhammo ca desito yovinayocapaññatto. ‘‘Mamaccayenā’’ti mamātikkamena. Mayi parinibbuteti vuttaṃ hoti. Satthā bhavissatīti pāṭhaseso. ‘‘Saṃvaṇṇito’’ti suṭṭhutaraṃvaṇṇito thomito. ‘‘Kalyāṇappaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhitopī’’ti tīsukalyāṇappaṭipattīsu aññatarappaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhitopi. ‘‘Aṭṭhitopī’’ti sabbappaṭipattibāhiro dussīlopāpadhammoti adhippāyo. Visesato pana vinayappaṭipatti eva idha pariyattāti daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘So’’ti sodussīlo pāpadhammo. Attanopi saraṇaṃ nahoti. Avassaṃ apāyagāmīyeva so hotīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Kuto saraṇaṃ bhavissatī’’ti yojanā. ‘‘Anekesu suttasahassesū’’ti vinayepi bahūni garahasuttapadāni dissanti suttantesupi. Visesato pana aggikkhandhopamasuttādīsu.
关于“正法”一词的含义。“令诸烦恼寂灭、止息,所以称为寂静”——针对这个语义,才说“烦恼已寂灭者”。而“寂静”这个词,也出现在“被赞叹的”“被尊敬的”“善士”“智者”这些用法中——针对这个词典义,才说“被赞叹者”等等。“真实即法,是正法”,这是句子的连接方式。借此显示:从自性上说,它是真实存在的,所以是寂静。“彼”指外道的法。“持者”指通过听闻、受持、忆持、行道等方式持守的人。那样只会带来不利,因为大多数情况下会导向恶趣的果报——这是其意趣所在。“然而此”则指导师的正法。“如是持者”指持此为我之利益的人,那样只会带来利益,因为能导向善趣与涅槃——这是其意趣所在。
Saddhammavacanatthe. Kilesesamenti vūpasamentīti santoti vacanatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘samitakilesāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Santa saddo pana pasattheca, pūjiteca, sappuriseca, paṇḍiteca, dissatīti imaṃ abhidhānatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘pasatthāna’’ntiādivuttaṃ. ‘‘Saccovā dhammo saddhammo’’ti yojanā. Etena sabhāvato atthisaṃvijjatīti santoti dasseti. ‘‘So’’ti aññatitthiya dhammo. ‘‘Dhārentassā’’ti savanuggahadhāraṇappaṭipajjanādivasena dhārentassa. Ahitoyeva sampajjati, yebhuyyena duggati vipākattāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Ayaṃ panā’’ti satthu saddhammo pana. ‘‘Tathā dhārentassā’’ti ayaṃ me hitoti dhārentassa hitoyevasampajjati, sugati nibbāna sampāpakattāti adhippāyo.
“同见同戒者”,就是指见解相同、戒行相同的人。这里用这个词来说明:见解和戒行相同的人被算在一起,所以叫“群”;他们聚集在一起、被合为一处,所以叫“僧团”——这就是所要表达的意思。共同一起修行法的人,就是同法者,也就是在同一位导师的法和律中出家的人。这里说的是那些同法者。世尊的声闻僧团被称为最上的群。世间无论有什么僧团或群体,如来的声闻僧团被说成是它们中最上的。正是这个意思:这里所说的“群中最上”,是依照形容词与不变词的搭配用法来说的。因为“最上”这个词只是功德之名,所以说它“只在功德上使用”。这里的“以此”,就是用“最上”这个词来说的。“群”在这里说的就是僧团,因为“僧团”这个词本身也惯用于表示集合体。它在律事中是众所周知的,也就是四众僧团、五众僧团、十众僧团、二十众僧团、超过二十众僧团,以及四众应作之事、五众应作之事等等,这些都是众所周知、明确可见的。
布施被称为“供养”,是因为人们相信业与业果,为了将来获得异熟果报而布施,这种布施业能使众生增长,所以叫供养。能够接受这种供养的人,就是应供者。“能够”是指:由于他是无上福田,具有殊胜性,能使施者所期望、所希求的将来果报很好地成就,不让施者失望,并能带来不可计算、不可衡量的增长,所以能够接受。这样的布施才叫广大的布施。如果这种布施施给破戒的人,因为他们的福田被污染了,就不能成就施者所期望、所希求的果报,或者没有果报,或者果报很少。这样一来,他们就使施者失望,也就是毁坏了福德果报。而且他们自己,或者因为接受那样的布施,或者因为受用,或者因为使信众的布施堕落,就成为恶趣的归属者。所以他们不能接受这样的布施。
“具足戒之事名为共识”,从一种角度说,共识之事就叫作羯磨。它虽然没有被归入他们所说的共识之事中,但因为是通过称为白四羯磨语的僧团共识而成立的,所以从那个角度说,就叫作共识之事。“达到具足戒之地后”,就是达到称为具足戒之地的更高阶段之后。正如在律藏比丘分别中所说:“以白四羯磨,不动摇,堪任地位。”其中,“堪任地位”的意思是:能够达到称为具足戒地的那个地位。“具足戒地”说的就是具足戒。“在律事中众所周知”,就是在“诸尊者,请僧团听我说”等等当中明确可见。
另外,“共识僧团”也可以成立,就像“天众来集”等说法一样,因为众多人集合在一起,依世间共识而成立,所以叫共识僧团。“圣者补特伽罗的集合”,是指善凡夫比丘按照前面所说的方式,被包含在入流道位中,因此连同他一起,共有八种圣者补特伽罗的集合。“包含在共识僧团中”,这句话表明:应供僧团不应该被单独提出来说;如果不需要单独提出来,那也就没有必要说“共识僧团”,只应该说“世尊的声闻僧团”。这是事实。不过在这里,因为“僧团”这个词出现的地方有两种,所以说僧团有两种。其中,共识僧团出现的地方,就是前面说的“在律事中”。现在为了显示圣僧团出现的地方,就说“虽然如此”等等。
其中,在皈依……乃至随念处,应当取已达具足戒的比丘僧团。但在供养清净处,在个人布施中,具备四入流支的近事男或沙弥也可以。在僧团布施中,则只有比丘僧团。“如是如是赞叹后”,就是以“应请、应迎请、应供、应合掌、是世间无上福田”等等,好好地称赞之后。那个应供僧团。“凡夫僧团”,这是指没有圣僧团、只有凡夫僧团的情况。在这里,以“僧团”这个词,也应当取属于僧团的一位比丘。如果他还是凡夫,就不是无上福田;如果他是圣者补特伽罗,就是无上福田。
‘‘Samānadiṭṭhisīlāna’’nti samānadiṭṭhikānaṃ samānasīlānañca. Etena samānadiṭṭhisīlā janā gaṇīyanti etthāti gaṇo. Saṃhanīyanti ekatokarīyanti etthāti saṅghoti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Saha ekato dhammaṃ carantīti sahadhammikā. Ekassa satthuno dhamma vinaye pabbajitā. Tesaṃ sahadhammikānaṃ. Bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho uttamagaṇo nāma. Ye keci loke saṅghāvā gaṇāvā. Tathāgatassa sāvakasaṅgho tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatīti hi vuttaṃ. Soyeva idha gaṇuttamoti vuccati visesana para nipāta vasenāti adhippāyo. Uttamasaddassa guṇanāmattā ‘‘guṇamhiyeva pavattatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tenā’’ti uttama saddena. ‘‘Gaṇoti saṅghoyeva vuccati’’ saṅghasaddassapi samūhaṭṭhe niruḷhattā, ‘‘so vinayakammesu pasiddho’’ti pañcasaṅghā catuvaggasaṅgho, pañcavaggasaṅgho, dasavaggasaṅgho, vīsativaggasaṅgho, atirekavīsativaggasaṅgho, catuvaggakaraṇīyaṃ kammaṃ, pañcavaggakaraṇīyaṃ kammantiādinā pasiddho pākaṭo. Dakkhiṇā vuccati kammañca kammaphalañca saddahitvā āyatiṃ vipākapphalappaṭi lābhatthāya dinnaṃ dānakammaṃ dakkhanti vaḍḍhanti sattā etāyāti katvā. Taṃdakkhiṇaṃ paṭiggaṇhituṃ arahatīti dakkhiṇeyyo. ‘‘Arahatī’’ti ca anuttara puññakkhetta visesattādāyakena icchita patthitassa āyatiṃ phalassa suṭṭhusampādanavasena dāyakassa ca avirādhanato asaṅkhyeyyāppameyyavaḍḍhi āvahanato ca paṭiggaṇhituṃ arahati. Evarūpaṃhidānaṃ nāma uḷāradānaṃ hoti. Taṃ yesudussīlesudiyyati. Tesaṃ khetta duṭṭhattā dāyakena icchitapatthitaṃ phalaṃ na sampādeti. Nipphalaṃ vā hoti. Appapphalaṃ vā. Evaṃsati, te dāyakañca virādhenti nāma. Puññapphalāni ca vināsenti nāma. Sayañca taṃdānaṃ paṭiggahaṇato vā paribhogato vā saddhādeyyaṃ vinipātanato vā duggati bhāgino honti. Tasmāte evarūpaṃ dānaṃ paṭiggaṇhituṃ nārahantīti. ‘‘Upasampadākammaṃ sammuti nāmā’’ti ekena pariyāyena sammuti kammaṃ nāma. Tañhi kāmaṃtera sasusammuti kammesunāgataṃ. Ñatti catuttha kammavācā saṅkhātāya pana saṅghasammutiyā siddhattā tena pariyāyena sammuti kammanti vuccatīti. ‘‘Upasampannabhūmiṃ patvā’’ti upasampannabhūmi saṅkhātaṃ upariṭhānantaraṃ patvā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ vinaye bhikkhu vibhaṅge. Ñatti catutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahenāti. Tattha, ‘‘ṭhānārahenā’’ti upasampanna bhūmisaṅkhātaṃ ṭhānantaraṃ pāpetuṃ arahenāti attho. ‘‘Upasampannabhūmī’’ti ca upasampanna sīlaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Vinayakammesu pasiddho’’ti. Suṇātumebhante saṅgho tiādīsu pākaṭo. Apica ‘‘sammuti saṅgho’’ti, devasaṅghāsamāgatātiādīsu viya bahūnaṃ samūhanaṭṭhena lokasammutiyā siddhosaṅgho sammuti saṅghotipi yujjati. ‘‘Ariyapuggalasamūho’’ti puthujjanakalyāṇako bhikkhu pubbe vuttanayena sotāpatti maggaṭṭhe saṅgahitoti, tena saha aṭṭhavidho ariya puggalasamūho. ‘‘Sammuti saṅghe antogadhoyevā’’ti etena dakkhiṇeyyasaṅgho nāma visuṃ navattabbo. Tasmiñca navattabbe sati, sammuti saṅghotipi vattabba kiccaṃ natthi. Bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho tveva vattabbaṃ hotīti dasseti. Saccametaṃ. Idha pana saṅghavacanena āgataṭṭhānassa duvidhattā saṅghassa duvidhatā vuttā. Tattha sammuti saṅghassa āgataṭṭhānaṃ vinayakammesūti vuttameva. Idāni ariyasaṅghassa āgataṭṭhānaṃ dassento ‘‘tathāpī’’tiādimāha. Tattha saraṇa gamana…pe… anussatiṭṭhānesu upasampannabhūto bhikkhusaṅghova gahetabbo. Dakkhiṇāvisuddhiṭṭhāne pana puggalikadānesu catūhi sotāpattiyaṅgehi samannāgato upāsakopi sāmaṇeropi yujjati. Saṅghika dānesu pana bhikkhusaṅghova. ‘‘Tathā tathā saṃvaṇṇetvā’’ti āhuneyyo, pāhuneyyo, dakkhiṇeyyo, añjalīkaraṇīyyo, anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassā, tiādināsuṭṭhu thometvā. So dakkhiṇeyya saṅgho. ‘‘Puthujjana saṅgho’’ti idaṃ ariya saṅghena vinākevalaṃ puthujjanasaṅghaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ettha ca saṅgha vacanena saṅgha pariyāpanno ekopi bhikkhu gahetabbo. So sace puthujjano hoti, anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ nahoti. Yadi ariya puggalo hoti, anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ hoti.
在《施分别经》里说到:阿难,将来会有一些属于凡夫种姓、只是脖子上缠着袈裟、戒行败坏、品性恶劣的人。人们还是会为了僧团而布施给他们。阿难,那时我说,以僧团为对象的布施是不可计算、不可衡量的。因此应当知道:只要到了僧团这个层面,就没有哪个比丘不被包含在应受供养的僧团里。
Dakkhiṇavibhaṅgasutte saṅghikadāne bhavissanti kho panānanda gotrabhuno kāsāvakaṇṭhā dussīlā pāpadhammā. Tesaṃpi saṅghaṃ uddissa dānaṃ dassanti. Tadāpānanda saṅghagataṃ dakkhiṇaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ appameyyanti vadāmīti vuttattā saṅghikaṭṭhānaṃ patvā koci bhikkhu dakkhiṇeyya saṅghe asaṅgahitoti natthīti daṭṭhabbo.
毁坏田地者,称为田的毁坏者,即杂草。田的毁坏者就是烦恼。这在《法句经》里已经说过。
Khettaṃ dūsentīti khettaduṭṭhāni. Tiṇāni. Khettaduṭṭhā kilesā. Vuttañhidhammapade.
田地因杂草而败坏,众生因贪欲而败坏;
因此,布施于离贪者,能得大果报。
田地因杂草而有过失,众生因嗔怒而有过失;
因此,布施于离嗔者,能得大果报。
田地因为有杂草而有了瑕疵,这些众生因为有愚痴而有了瑕疵;
所以,布施给那些已经断除愚痴的人,会带来大果报。
Tiṇadosāni khettāni, rāgadosā ayaṃpajā; Tasmāhi vītarāgesu, dinnaṃ hoti mahapphalaṃ. Tiṇadosāni khettāni, dosadosā ayaṃpajā; Tasmāhi vītadosesu, dinnaṃ hoti mahapphalaṃ. Tiṇadosāni khettāni, mohadosā ayaṃpajā; Tasmāhi vītamohesu, dinnaṃ hoti mahapphalanti.
这里,为了说明从有余的角度来看,使田地受染的烦恼,所以说了“有身见、疑、随眠”。“有性”是指存在的、现存的状态,这个词拆解为“有”和“性”。“此”是指凡夫僧团。“依正法句所说之理”,就是依照“从最初开始”等所说的理路。
Idha pana sātissayato khettaduṭṭhe kilese dassetuṃ ‘‘sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchānusayāna’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sabbhāvā’’ti santassa vijjamānassabhāvo sabbhāvotiviggaho. ‘‘Assā’’ti puthujjana saṅghassa. ‘‘Saddhammapade vuttanayenā’’ti apicayadaggenāti vuttanayena.
8“敬礼”就是让人说“愿善人幸福”,这样让人行礼之后再礼拜。所谓敬礼,其实就是礼拜,所以说“礼拜后”。因为行礼的人在向应受礼敬的长者礼拜时,就是在让对方那样说。而那样说,也是应受礼敬的长者应尽的义务。“令现前”就是让对方出现在面前。“三种”是按门来分,分为三种。“应受礼敬者”指佛陀等。“俯身”就是低头。“不应敬礼者”指比丘不应礼敬的对象,比如戒腊很浅的新学比丘等。“功德句”就是显示功德的“阿拉汉、正自觉者”等词句。这里“以身敬礼”等说法是间接的表达,就像“以眼见色”一样。正如注释书中所说:“以眼见色”,是以作为工具、被称为“眼”的能见色的眼识来见色。然而古师们说:眼不能见色,因为它没有心;心不能见,因为它没有眼。但当门与所缘接触时,是依靠眼净色这个处所的某个心在见。这种说法就像“以弓射箭”等,是包含辅助条件的说法。因此,“以眼见色”就是“以眼识见色”,这才是这里的含义。在这里,“以身”是以身表色为门、作为工具。因此,如果“以眼”一词是间接表达,那么“以身”一词也应理解为间接表达。同样,当“以眼”一词意为“以眼识”时,“以身”一词也应理解为“以身业”。在“以语敬礼、以意敬礼”等句中,也是同样的道理。这样一来,“以身业敬礼、以语业敬礼、以意业敬礼,以三种业敬礼”,这才成为正面的直接说法。这一切都是因为见于注释书中有关根律仪戒的段落才说的。不过,“以眼”这个词,本来就是正面的直接工具格。为什么呢?因为眼识被称为“见”,而眼是它的所依处,是前生、根、缘的特殊条件。在“以耳闻声”等句中,也是同样的道理。
8. ‘‘Abhivādiyā’’ti sukhīhohisappurisāti evaṃ abhivadāpetvā. Abhivādanañca nāma vandanāmevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘vanditvā’’ti. Vandantohi vandaneyye vuddhe tathā vadāpeti nāma. Tathā vadanañca vandaneyyānaṃvuddhānaṃ vattaṃ. ‘‘Paccupaṭṭhāpetvā’’ti paṭimukhaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā. ‘‘Tividhā’’ti dvāra bhedena tividhā. ‘‘Vandaneyyāna’’nti buddhādīnaṃ. ‘‘Nipajjanto’’ti nipatanto. ‘‘Avandiyesū’’ti bhikkhūhi avanditabbe sunavakatarādīsu. ‘‘Guṇapadānī’’ti guṇadīpakāni arahaṃ sammāsambuddhotiādipadāni. Etthacakāyenavandatītiādi upacāra vacanaṃ hoti. Yathā cakkhunā rūpaṃ passatīti. Tathāhi vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti karaṇavasena cakkhūti laddhavohārena rūpadassana samatthena cakkhu viññāṇena rūpaṃ disvā. Porāṇā panāhu cakkhu rūpaṃ na passati, acittattā. Cittaṃ na passati, acakkhuttā. Dvārārammaṇa saṅghaṭṭane pana sati cakkhu pasādavatthu kenacittena passati. Īdisī panesā kathā dhanunā vijjhatītiādīsu viya sasambhāra kathānāma hoti. Tasmā cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti cakkhu viññāṇena rūpaṃ disvāti ayamevettha atthoti. Etthahi ‘‘kāyenā’’ti kāya viññattisaṅkhātaṃ dvāra rūpaṃ karaṇaṃ hoti. Tasmā cakkhunāti vacane upacāra vacane sati kāyenāti vacanaṃpi upacāra vacananti viññāyati. Tathā cakkhunāti pade cakkhuviññāṇenāti atthe sati kāyenāti padepi kāyakammenāti attho viññāyati. Vācāya vandati, manasāvandatī,ti padesupi esanayo. Evañca sati, kāya kammenavandāmi, vacīkammena vandāmi, manokammena vandāmi, tīhi kammehi vandāmīti idameva mukhyavacananti siddhaṃ hoti. Sabbamidaṃ indriya saṃvarasīlaṭṭhāne aṭṭhakathāsu āgatattā vuttaṃ. Cakkhunāti idaṃ pana mukhya karaṇa vacanameva sambhavati. Kasmā, cakkhussa dassanasaṅkhātassa cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthu purejātindriyapaccayavisesattā. Sotena saddaṃsutvātiādīsupi esanayo.
“以身敬礼、以语敬礼”这句话里,身表和语表这两种色法,虽然是由与心俱生的思即业所生起的,但那个思业并不是由这两种表色所生起的。尽管如此,这两种色法对于那个思业成就身敬礼业和语敬礼业来说,是一种特别的亲依止缘条件。就像母亲所生的儿子长大之后,在各种事务中成为母亲有力的依止。正因如此,这两种色法在阿毗达摩里被称为“门色”。所以,“以身、以语”也应该理解为表示主要工具的说法。不过,如果有人说“以身”的意思是“以身业”,那这个业就和敬礼的行为没有区别了。回答:并不会没有区别。为什么呢?因为经中说“诸比丘,我说思就是业,思已之后,以身、以语、以意造业”,其中“思已”是指以先前的思而思,“造业”是指以之后的决意思来造业,这里的意思也是如此。同样,在这里也有先前思和之后思的可能。其中,“以身业”指的是先前的思业,“敬礼”指的是之后的决意思业。
Kāyenavandati, vācāyavandatī,ti ettha taṃkāyavacīviññatti rūpa dvayaṃ kiñcāpi sahajāta cetanā kammena jātaṃ hoti. Na taṃ cetanākammaṃ viññatti dvayenajātaṃ. Evaṃ santepi taṃ rūpa dvayaṃ tassācetanāya kāyavandanākamma, vacīvandanākamma siddhiyā upanissaya paccayaviseso hoti. Yathātaṃ mātito jāto putto vuddhi patto taṃ taṃ kammesu mātuyā bala vūpanissayo hoti. Evañca katvā taṃ rūpadvayaṃ abhidhamme dvārarūpanti vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘kāyena, vācāyā,ti idaṃpi mukhya karaṇa vacanamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kāyenāti pana kāyakammenāti atthe sati, tassakammassa vandanākiriyāya saha abhedo āpajjatīti ce. Nāpajjati. Kasmā cetanāhaṃ bhikkhave kammaṃ vadāmi, cetayitvā kammaṃ karoti ‘kāyena, vācāya, manasāti imasmiṃ sutte yathāhi ‘‘cetayitvā’’ti purimacetanāhi ceta yitvā . ‘‘Kammaṃ karotī’’ti pacchimaṃ sanniṭṭhāpana cetanā kammaṃ karotīti attho. Tathā idhapi purimapacchimacetanā sambhavatoti. Ettha hi ‘‘kāyakammenā’’ti purimacetanā kammaṃ gayhati. ‘‘Vandatī’’ti pacchima sanniṭṭhāpanacetanākammanti.
9“造作”就是安排、制作。“将会造作”是对不能现见的过去或未来之事的说法。“载于贝叶”就是通过刻写在贝叶上而得以载录。
9. ‘‘Racayanto’’ti vidahanto. ‘‘Racayissatī’’ti apaccakkhe atīte anāgatavacanaṃ. ‘‘Potthakāruḷha’’nti potthaka pattesulikhanavasena āruḷhaṃ.
1010. 关于阿毗达摩的义释。“在阿毗达摩中”指在阿毗达摩论典中。通过“此处”“以此”这些词,也能知道“摄”这个词采用了同格构词方式。“另有两部巴利圣典被称为”。为什么说那两部巴利圣典名为阿毗达摩?于是说了“而彼……”等话。“如其所生起”指依照自身的缘而相应地生起。“唯在胜义法中”指:诸比丘,有二人;诸比丘,有三人等,这类以施设言说方式而进行的开示,若离开胜义法便不能生起。因为正是依据胜义法的种种差异,才有诸人的种种差异。所以唯开显胜义法,并非开显教令。“于二法中”是简别用的处格。“彼乐于任一”是所简别的对象。“彼”指彼法。“从另一”指从另一法,即从经教法。“如是而作”意思是“以此理由”。与“在注释书中被说”相连。应当这样理解:以无余分别的方式而有殊胜性,以纯粹以法为所依的开示生起方式而有差别性。“由于”意思是:由于无余分别,由于没有极度广说的开示。为什么唯在天人中说?因此说了“非诸人……”等话。其中,“非诸人能领受”是连接。“堪能流转”指足以令其流转。“论道”指开示之论的连贯。“随一根本论母”指随顺善法、不善法等这一根本阿毗达摩论母。“于彼”指于阿毗达摩。殊胜差别性是连接。“于彼处”指在《殊胜义论》中。就在开头,以何义为阿毗达摩?在说了法殊胜、法差别之义后,广释其义:触及经时,五蕴唯以一部分被分别,并非以无余方式;而触及阿毗达摩时,则以无余方式被分别。因此说了“名为法者……”等话。“然而法”指两部巴利圣典。“虽如是存在”指在《殊胜义论》中虽如此审察。“一切中最尊”指三藏中一切最尊。为什么应是一切中最尊?因此说了“若毁谤律者……”等话。其中,“毁谤者”指呵责者。轮转、流转故为轮。世间中,任何沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵天都不能令其回转的教令,名为教令轮。同样,不能令其回转的开示之规定,名为法轮。其中,依“若比丘行淫法,是波罗夷,不共住”等方式而起的教令,名为教令轮。“诸比丘,此是四圣谛”等开示之规定,名为法轮。这两者,无人能破坏,不能令波罗夷比丘成非波罗夷,不能令四谛法成非谛。若有人这么做,就会像提婆达多那样,成为堕恶趣者。波罗夷比丘若不令自己清净,就必定趣向恶趣。于一切律学处皆如是。如是,因不能被任何人令回转,故此二者为不可转之轮。“律名为教法之根”指:律住立时,比丘僧伽显现;比丘僧伽显现时,三种正法也显现,三种师教也住立。如是,律为三种教法之根。若问:教理正法显现时,三种教法如何住立?答说。其中,“教法住立”指住立多久?古注释书说住立五千年。邪说者的诽谤:在律藏《小品·比丘尼犍度》中,“阿难,若于我教法中,女人不得出家,正法可住立一千年。如今因乔达弥再三请求,允许女人出家。阿难,如今正法唯住立五百年。”因此,佛教唯住立五百年,此后一日也不住立,如今唯是教法的相似影像。这唯是他们的邪说。“唯五百年”这句话并非决定语,仅是显示女人过患的话。而且那过患,由大师制立八敬法后,已被遮止。再者,“一千年”这句话才成为决定语。于此,有些人说:教法唯住立一千年,此后一日也不住立,即隐没。那时,界也成为非界,后来在这些界中受具足者也成为未受具足。如今唯是教法的相似影像。这也是因为未见义理与理由而妄说,所以唯是邪说。然而此处之义为:“正法可住立一千年”指正法无退减而住立一千年,此后则不住立,渐次退减而灭去。问:如何是无退减而住立?如何是退减而灭去?答说:应知有五僧伽,正法住立于僧伽中。哪五种?漏尽者僧伽、不还者僧伽、一来者僧伽、预流者僧伽、善凡夫僧伽。其中,一千年内,所有五僧伽都显现。如是,正法无退减而住立一千年。此后,漏尽者僧伽不显现,其余四千年渐次成为其余四僧伽的领域。如是,此后退减而灭去。这是此处之义。理由被说:“正法可住立”中,有三种正法:教理正法、行道正法、通达正法。它也被称为三种教法。其中,教理正法指有注释的三藏。它如今圆满住立。教理教法如何能成为唯相似影像?而且从事教理的比丘,如今可见有数十万之多。这教法如何此后一日也不住立?而且那些住立于戒与行道的比丘,如今有数十万。行道教法如何此后不住立?教理与行道住立时,不可说通达正法不住立。譬如有一位财主,为子孙相续故,将大宝库藏于地中多处,并在书中完整记录它们的情况而安置。当他们地、书、文字尚存时,不可说他们的库藏已灭、已隐没。这教法应如是观。其中,三藏佛语如库藏所藏之地,法宝如财宝。又如生于财主家族、具力之人,见书而善掘,必得那些宝。如是,此处具力比丘闻教法而善行道,必得那些法宝。当可得时,如何说那些法宝已隐没?而且界的存续或灭去,唯是教令轮的范畴,不是法轮。又所说“正法唯住立五百年”及“正法可住立一千年”,这句话唯是法轮,不是教令轮。而结界的灭去,由二因灭去、隐没:或以作为教令轮的羯磨语而废除,或以教法隐没。其中,千年终时,没有羯磨语废除,而教法隐没者,于未来由界般涅槃所限定。界般涅槃生起时,一切教令轮皆消失、隐没。然而法轮于天界,直至未来佛时也将流转,如《阿罗婆迦问偈》。“复次,阿难,我为汝等所说所制之法与律,于我灭后为汝等之师。”这三藏法、律为师,如今正开显照耀世间三种教法而住立。由此,诸佛弟子人天,与诸外道众不共的大智光,如今正照耀流转。他们闻由一切知智所说、如今仍住持的八万四千法蕴,以随一切知智的闻所成智,了知于无始轮回、无边世界之一切三界流转,及一切法之流转。未来,为生天、为道果涅槃,而发起种种福业事,出家,通达教理,圆满行道,修习修习。这一切不是教法的相似影像,纯是教法。为什么?因为如法如律行道故。而且以此行道,未来能令获得天、道、果、涅槃故。至此,一切邪说者的邪说已被破除、粉碎。
10. Abhidhammatthapade. ‘‘Abhidhamme’’ti abhidhammappakaraṇe. ‘‘Ettha, etenā’’ti vacanehi saṅgahasaddassa ekasesavidhānaṃpi viññāyati. ‘‘Aññaṃpāḷidvayaṃ vuccati’’. Kasmātaṃ pāḷidvayaṃ abhidhammo nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tañcā’’tiādi. ‘‘Yathāpavatte’’ti attano paccayānurūpaṃ pavatte. ‘‘Paramatthadhamme evā’’ti dve me bhikkhave puggalā, tayomebhikkhave puggalātiādinā paññattivohārena pavattāpi desanā paramattha dhammehi vinā napavattati. Paramattha dhammānaṃ nānattavaseneva puggalānaṃ nānattasambhavato. Tasmā paramatthadhamme eva dīpeti. Na āṇāvidhānaṃ dīpeti. ‘‘Dvīsudhammesū’’ti niddhāraṇe bhummavacanaṃ. ‘‘Yoitarato’’ti niddhāraṇīyaṃ. ‘‘Yo’’ti yo dhammo. ‘‘Itarato’’ti itara dhammato suttanta dhammato. ‘‘Evañca katvā’’ti iminākāraṇenāti attho. Aṭṭhakathāsu vuttanti sambandho. Desetabbappakārānaṃ anavasesavibhattivasena atirekatā, suddha dhammādhiṭṭhāna desanā pavattivasena visesatā yojetabbā. ‘‘Yato’’ti yasmā anavasesavibhattito, ativitthāradesanābhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā devesu eva desentīti āha ‘‘na hi manussā’’tiādiṃ. Tattha ‘‘na hi manussā paṭiggahetuṃ sakkontī’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Pavattanayogya’’nti pavattanatthāya pahontaṃ. ‘‘Kathāmagga’’nti desanākathāpabandhaṃ. ‘‘Ekamātikānu bandhā’’ti kusalā dhammā akusalā dhammātiādikaṃ ekaṃ abhidhamma mātikaṃ anugatā. ‘‘Tassā’’ti abhidhammassa. Atireka visesatanti sambandho. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti tissaṃ aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ. Ādimhiyevatattha kenaṭṭhena abhidhammo, dhammātireka dhammavisesaṭṭhe nā-ti vatvā tadatthaṃ vitthārento suttañhi patvā pañcakkhandhā ekadeseneva vibhattā, nanippadesena. Abhidhammaṃ patvā pana nippadesatova vibhattā-ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dhammanāmikāna’’ntiādiṃ. ‘‘Dhammo panā’’ti pāḷidvayamāha.‘‘Evaṃ santepī’’ti aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ evaṃ vicāritepisati. ‘‘Sabbajeṭṭhako’’ti tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ majjhesabbajeṭṭhako. Kasmā sabbajeṭṭhako siyāti āha ‘‘vinayaṃ vivaṇṇentassahī’’tiādiṃ. Tattha ‘‘vivaṇṇentassā’’ti garahantassa. Carati pavattatīti cakkaṃ. Lokasmiṃ kenaci samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā paṭinivattituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ āṇāvidhānaṃ āṇācakkaṃ nāma. Tathā asakkuṇeyyaṃ desanā vidhānaṃ dhammacakkaṃ nāma. Tattha, yo pana bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati, pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso-tiādinā nayena pavattaṃ āṇāvidhānaṃ āṇācakkaṃ nāma. Cattārimāni bhikkhave ariyasaccānī-tiādikaṃ desanāvidhānaṃ dhammacakkaṃ nāma. Tadubhayaṃpi koci bhindituṃ pārājikaṃ vā bhikkhuṃ apārājikaṃ kātuṃ catussaccaṃ vā dhammaṃ asaccaṃ kātuṃ nasakkoti. Atha kho karontoyeva devadattoviya āpāyiko hoti. Pārājikoca bhikkhu attānaṃ suddhaṃ akaronto apāyagāmīyeva hoti. Evaṃ sabbesu vinaya sikkhāpadesu. Evaṃ kenaci paṭinivattituṃ asakkuṇeyyattā tadubhayaṃpi appaṭivattiyaṃ cakkaṃ nāma hoti. ‘‘Vinayo nāma sāsanassa mūla’’nti vinaye ṭhite bhikkhusaṅgho paññāyati. Bhikkhu saṅghe paññāyante tividhopisaddhammopaññāyati, tividhaṃpi satthusāsanaṃ tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ vinayo tividhassasāsanassa mūlaṃ hotīti. Kathañcapariyattisaddhamme paññāyante tividhaṃpi sāsanaṃ tiṭṭhatīti. Vuccate. Tattha sāsanaṃ tiṭṭhatīti kittakaṃkālaṃ tiṭṭhatīti. Pañcavassasahassāni tiṭṭhatīti porāṇaṭṭhakathāsukathayiṃsu. Micchāvādinopanavadanti vinaye cūḷavaggebhikkhunikkhandhake sace ānanda mamasāsanemātugāmo pabbajjaṃ nalabheyya. Vassasahassaṃ saddhammo tiṭṭheyya. Idāni mātugāmassa pabbajjā anuññātā gotamiyā punappunaṃ āyācanaṃ upādāya. Pañcevadāni ānanda vassasatāni saddhammoṭhassatīti vuttaṃ. Tasmā buddhasāsanaṃ pañcavassasatāni eva tiṭṭhati. Tatoparaṃ ekadivasaṃpi na tiṭṭhati. Idāni sāsanappaṭi rūpakamattaṃ hotīti. Taṃ tesaṃ micchā vacanamattaṃ. ‘‘Pañcevavassasatānī’’ti idaṃ pana sanniṭṭhāna vacanaṃ nahoti. Mātugāmānaṃ ādīnava dīpanamattavacanaṃ. So ca ādīnavo aṭṭhagarudhamme saṇṭhapetvā satthārā eva paṭibāhito. Puna ‘‘vassasahassa’’nti idamevasanniṭṭhāna vacanaṃ jātanti. Etthapikecivadanti vassasahassameva sāsanaṃ tiṭṭhati, tatoparaṃ ekadivasa mattaṃpi na tiṭṭhati, antaradhāyati. Tadā sīmāyopi asīmā honti. Pacchātāsu upasampāditāpi anupasampannā honti. Idāni sāsanappaṭi rūpakamattaṃ hotīti. Idaṃpi tesaṃ atthañcakāraṇañca adisvā ajānitvā vuttattā micchā vacanamattaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ panettha attho. ‘‘Vassasahassaṃ saddhammo tiṭṭheyyā’’ti vassasahassameva saddhammo aparihāyamāno tiṭṭheyya. Tatoparaṃ pana na tiṭṭheyya, anukkamena parihāyamāno gaccheyyāti. Kathaṃ pana aparihāyamāno tiṭṭhati, kathañca parihāyamāno gacchatīti. Vuccate. Pañcasaṅghā veditabbā. Yesu saṅghe susaddhammo tiṭṭhati. Katame pañca. Khīṇāsavasaṅgho, anāgāmisaṅgho, sakadāgāmisaṅgho, sotāpannasaṅgho, puthujjanakalyāṇakasaṅgho,ti. Tattha, vassasahassabbhantare sabbepañcasaṅghā paññāyanti. Evaṃ vassasahassaṃ saddhammo aparihāyamāno tiṭṭhati. Tatoparaṃ khīṇāsavasaṅgho na paññāyati. Sesāni cattārivassasahassāni anukkamena sesānaṃ catunnaṃ saṅghānaṃ khettāni jātāni. Evaṃ tatoparaṃ parihāyamāno gacchatīti ayamettha attho. Kāraṇaṃ vuccate. ‘‘Saddhammo tiṭṭheyyā’’ti ettha tividho saddhammo ‘pariyattisaddhammo, paṭipattisaddhammo, paṭivedhasaddhammo,ti. So eva tividhaṃ sāsananti ca vuccati. Tattha, pariyatti saddhammo nāma sāṭṭhakathānitīṇipiṭakāni. Soca etarahi paripuṇṇo tiṭṭhati. Kathaṃ pariyatti sāsanaṃ paṭirūpakamattaṃ bhaveyya. Bhikkhū ca pariyattikammikā aneka satasahassamattā paññāyanti. Kathañcidaṃ sāsanaṃ tatoparaṃ ekadivasaṃpi na tiṭṭheyya. Te ca bhikkhū sīlappaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhitā aneka satasahassamattā etarahi sandhissanti. Kathañca paṭipatti sāsanaṃ tatoparaṃ na tiṭṭheyya. Pariyattiyāca paṭipattiyāca tiṭṭhamānāyapaṭivedhasaddhammopi na tiṭṭhatīti na vattabbo. Yathāhi-eko dhanaseṭṭhi nāma atthi. So puttadhītu paramparānaṃ atthāya mahantāratananidhayo bhūmiyaṃ bahūsuṭṭhānesu nidahitvā ṭhapitā honti. Potthakesu ca tesaṃ pavattiṃ paripuṇṇaṃ likhitvā ṭhapeti. Tattha nimīsu ca potthakesu ca akkharesu ca dharantesu tenidhayo nassanti antaradhāyantīti na vattabbāyeva. Evamidaṃ sāsanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tatthahi nidhīnaṃnidhānabhūmisadisaṃ tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ, dhanaratanasadisāni dhammaratanāni. Yathā ca seṭṭhivaṃsejāto balasampanno puriso potthakaṃ passitvā suṭṭhu khaṇanto tāniratanāni labhissatiyeva. Evamidhapi balasampanno bhikkhu desanādhammaṃ sutvā suṭṭhu paṭipajjanto tānidhammaratanāni labhissatiyeva. Labhamāne ca sati, kathaṃ tānidhammaratanāni antarahitāni. Sīmānañca pavattivānivatti vā āṇācakkasseva visayo hoti. Na dhammacakkassa. Yañca vuttaṃ-pañcevavassasatānisaddhammo ṭhassatīti ca, - vassasahassaṃ saddhammo tiṭṭheyyāti ca. Idañca vacanaṃ dhammacakkameva hoti, na āṇācakkaṃ. Baddhasīmāyo ca nivattamānā dvīhi kāraṇehi nivattanti antaradhāyanti. Āṇācakkabhūtāya kammavācāya samūhananena vā, sāsanassa vā antaradhānena. Tattha vassasahassapariyante kammavācāya samūhananañca natthi. Sāsanantaradhānañca nāma anāgate dhātuparinibbānena paricchinnaṃ hoti. Dhātuparinibbānehi jāte sabbaṃ āṇācakkaṃ vigataṃ hoti, antaradhāyati. Dhammacakkaṃ pana devalokesu yāvānāgatabuddhakālāpi pavattissatiyeva āḷavakapucchāgāthāyo viya. Apicayo vo ānanda mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto. So vo mamaccayena satthā-ti vuttaṃ. Socati piṭakabhūto dhammavinayo satthā etarahi tividhaṃpi sāsanaṃ lokassa dīpento pakāsento tiṭṭhati. Yatobuddhabhāsikānaṃ devamanussānaṃ nānā bāhirakehi janehi asādhāraṇo mahanto ñāṇāloko etarahi vijjotamāno pavattati. Tehi sabbaññutaññāṇena desitāni etarahidharamānāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandha sahassāni sutvā anamataggesaṃsāre anantāsu lokadhātūsu sabbaṃlokattayappavattiñca, sabbaṃdhammappavattiñca, sabbaññutaññāṇānugatikena sutamayaññāṇena jānanti. Āyatiñca saggatthāya ca maggaphalanibbānatthāya ca nānāpuññakiriyavatthūni ārabhanti, pabbajanti. Pariyattiṃ pariyāpuṇanti. Paṭipattiṃ pūrenti. Bhāvanaṃbhāventi. Idaṃ sabbaṃ sāsanappaṭirūpakamattaṃna hoti. Ekanta sāsanaṃ hoti. Kasmā, yathā dhammaṃ yathā vinayaṃ paṭipajjanato. Imāya ca paṭipattiyā āyatiṃ saggamaggaphala nibbānappaṭilābhāya saṃvattanikattāti. Ettāvatā sabbaṃ micchāvādīnaṃ micchāvacanaṃ vidhamitaṃviddhaṃsitaṃ hotīti.
顶礼偈颂的注释。
Paṇāmagāthāvaṇṇanā.
11在第二偈颂的注释中。“初偈颂”指第一偈颂的文句。“各各伴随其作用”指伴随各自的作用。“五义”指五种要略之义。“那些阿毗达摩义”指在《阿毗达摩义摄》中所阐明的那些阿毗达摩义。“于此”指在这第二偈颂中。“未说”指并非之前在论书中也已有说。句意是:阿毗达摩义在之前何处曾被说过呢?在三种义理抉择中指出第一种有时间上的矛盾之后,现在为了说明第二和第三种在言词上的矛盾,而说了“na ca”等词。其中,“仅在初”以此显示无论何时回顾时都是不重要的。“不重要的词”指在“阿毗达摩义摄”这一复合词中,前面的词是修饰词。其中,若作如此理顺,其意为:在那《阿毗达摩义摄论》中,或在那阿毗达摩义一词中,我已全面说及。那是不合理的。其意为:在那阿毗达摩中,是由世尊全面说及的,这才是合理的。不重要的词被回顾——如此便会招致过失。因此他说“因为如此回顾时”等。其中,“因为如此回顾时”即如《殊胜义论》中一般,在此当回顾“阿毗达摩义摄”一词时。“因为”一词是显示结果的词。也可理解为显示所得功德之词。“被排斥”,因为于彼阿毗达摩义摄之词中“我已具说”之义可能存在故。并非只有那一过失生起。为显示还有其余过失,故说“而此”等。句意为:以《界论》中所说的摄、非摄等方式。
11. Dutīyagāthāvaṇṇanāyaṃ. ‘‘Ādigāthāyā’’ti pathamagāthāvākyena. ‘‘Taṃ taṃ payojanasahite’’ti tenatenapayojanena sahite. ‘‘Pañca atthe’’ti pañcapiṇḍatthe. ‘‘Teabhidhammatthe’’ti abhidhammatthapade dīpite teabhidhammatthe. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti tissaṃ dutīyagāthāyaṃ. ‘‘Natu vutta’’nti napanapakaraṇaṃpi pubbevuttaṃ hoti. Abhidhammatthā kutopubbevuttā hontīti yojanā. Evaṃtīsu atthavikappesu pathamassa kālavirodhaṃ dassetvā idāni dutīya tatīyānaṃ saddatovirodhaṃ vattuṃ ‘‘nacā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘ādimhi yevā’’ti etena yadākadāci paccāmasanaṃ appadhānanti dasseti. ‘‘Appadhānapadānī’’ti abhidhammatthasaṅgahanti imasmiṃ ekasmiṃ samāsapade purimāni visesana padāni. Tattha sabbathāpi vuttāti yojite sati, tasmiṃ abhidhammatthasaṅgahappakaraṇe tasmiṃ abhidhammattha padevā sabbathā mayā vuttāti attho hoti. So na yujjati. Tasmiṃ abhidhamme buddhena bhagavatā sabbathā vuttāti attho yujjati. Appadhānapadaṃ paccāmasatīti dosopana āpajjateva. Tenāha ‘‘evañhisatī’’tiādiṃ. Tattha, ‘‘evañhisatī’’ti aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ viya idha abhidhammatthasaṅgahapadaṃ paccāmasante sati. Hisaddo phala vākyajotako. Laddhaguṇajotakotipi yujjati. ‘‘Paṭikkhittā hoti’’ tasmiṃ abhidhammatthasaṅgahapade mayā sabbathā vuttāti atthassa sambhavato. Na kevalaṃ so eva doso āpajjati. Aparopidoso atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sāhī’’tiādimāha. Dhātukathāyaṃ vuttenasaṅgahāsaṅgahādippakārenātiyojanā.
12在《胜义语注释》中。所谓“修饰语”,有时是为了陈述事实而使用,比如“黑乌鸦”“白鹭”;有时是为了排除其他而使用,比如“蓝布”“蓝花”。这里为了说明是为了排除其他,所以说了“有两种真实”等。所谓“施设”,就是被了知、被告知。而施设的成立,要依靠大众的共许和共认这两个条件,所以说“他们大众”等。关联是:“因此,它们被称为约定真实。”“由于被共许”,就是由于被言说和被认可。“语真实与离真实”中,语真实指离妄语的真实语。离真实指正语之离。因为仅凭远离妄语等语恶行,即被称为“语真实”。“由于是事物本身”,即由于是所依止之物。被称为约定真实,是因为被共许,且那共许是真实的,因为它是诸真实的事物本身,所以成为真实。由共许而成立的真实,也可称为约定真实。“正行者”,即依“不应杀生”“一切众生应无怨”等而正行。“一切世间成就”,即布施、持戒等福行事之果报所成的一切世间成就。一切“菩提资粮法”,即布施波罗蜜、持戒波罗蜜等波罗蜜法。“令圆满”,即令成就。“邪行者”,即依恶行、邪命等而邪行。“如此广大的约定真实”,以此说明:我唯取胜义真实,不应破坏约定真实。因为破坏者,便远离一切成就。他显示:如何破坏它呢?所谓“有情”不存在。由于有情不存在,所以“相续”不存在。执取“能生有的善不善业不存在”者,便住于断见。远离一切成就。成为恶趣的填充者。“令执取为存在”,即以概念、心、见、颠倒的事物性而令执取。因此说“萨迦耶见”等。“如此颠倒的约定真实”,以此说明:执取约定真实为坚固后,不应破坏胜义真实。因为破坏者,便不能从那些见中解脱。如何破坏它呢?执取蕴或蕴之外物为“我”或“命”,执取那些我与命死后断灭者,便住于断见。执取那些我与命在诸有中常存,从有至有轮回、流转者,便住于常见。“不令相违”,即不令颠倒生起。“那然而”,即自性真实。仅依体验之差别,受被称为乐。并非从一切方面说受是乐。因为从一切方面说受是苦。“一切受皆是苦”是主要意义。其中,体验之差别有三种:从乐而体验,从非乐而体验,从舍而体验。“皆是苦”,以怖畏义为苦。以怖畏义,即依见轮回怖畏者所应怖畏之义。其异熟为乐者,是乐异熟。即三地善法。“被许为善”,以此说明:即使在自性真实中,这些言说也依赖于世间共许。“有漏”,即与诸漏俱在。“杂染”,即与杂染法相应。与暴流、轭、取相应,即“暴流所至、轭所至、取所至”。内的、自己的。外的,如树与木之自性义。枝中的色法,以枝的自性义。属于有情相续的色无色法,以渴爱执取坚固义,从彼之外,以我、以自己、以更上之义为内,如此成为世间共许。因此说“内三”等。苦灭与道之状态,如是此四者名为圣谛。此即此四者。“不动”,以此说明圣字之义。三地法的乐性是不动的。为何?因为是无常法。执取那些法为乐,而作自己内支者,不久便得苦。若知那些法为苦,从彼解脱者,则不再得苦。在其余圣谛中,此理亦然。“其中”,即在所说的两种真实中。“因此说”,即获得功德之语。“离其他表示”,其中,其他表示即依八法之集合而显现瓶的形状、布的形状,彼形状不依他示,依自性而成立。名为维持思惟的作用存在。那被称为心。它不依他示而成。唯依自性而成。触的作用、受的作用、见的作用,此理亦然。为显示此义,说了“离其他表示”等。“以心思惟”,即以意识心令不存在的形状成为存在。“令有形状”,即令成身体。令事物具足,即说此义。“心所成、心所造”,如梦中见色,由心所作,由心所造。为何自性成立的胜义名为?因此说“它确实”等。“存在”,以此依语界而说义。依声与智不可得而应接近,故说义。从另一方面,即从思惟成立。“最上”,即增上。因此说“达到最上”。以此说最上字之增上义。现在为显示其最上义,说了“然而”等。其中,在此佛的教法中,有五种教法大事:应遍知法的遍知,应遍知法的遍知,应断法的断,应证法的证,应修法的修。其中,一切胜义法名为应遍知。苦谛法名为应遍知。集谛法名为应断。沙门果与涅槃名为应证。道谛法名为应修。于那些法、那些事成就故,在此教法中,教法事成就。达到究竟。那些法,因为对色等教法事不违逆、不欺诳,以最上义名为胜义。为显示此义,说了“然而”等。其中,“凡”即那些人。“此”即此法。“彼”即彼应遍知、彼应遍知、彼应断、彼应证、彼应修,关联如此。胜义注释竟。
12. Paramatthapadavaṇṇanāyaṃ. Visesanapadaṃ nāma katthaci bhūtakathanatthāyavā payujjati kaṇhokāko, setobako,ti. Katthaci aññanivattanatthāya vā payujjati nīlopaṭo, nīlaṃpuppha, nti. Idha pana añña nivattanatthāyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘duvidhānihisaccānī’’tiādimāha. Paññāpīyatītipaññatti. Paññāpanañca nāma samaggānaṃ janānaṃ vohārena ca sampaṭicchanena cāti dvīhi aṅgehi sijjhatīti āha ‘‘tecamahājanā’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Tasmāte sammuti saccanti vuccantī’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Sammatattā’’ti voharitattāceva sampaṭicchitattā ca. ‘‘Vacīsaccaviratisaccāna’’nti ettha vacīsaccaṃ nāma musāvādarahitaṃ saccavacanaṃ. Viratisaccaṃ nāma sammāvācāvirati. Sāhi musāvādādīhi vacīduccaritehi viramaṇamattena vacīsaccanti vuccati. ‘‘Vatthubhūtattā’’ti adhiṭṭhānabhūtattā. Sammutisaccanti vuccanti, sammatattā sammuti ca, sā saccānaṃ vatthubhūtattā saccañcāti katvā. Sammutiyā siddhaṃ saccaṃ sammutisaccantipi yujjati. ‘‘Sammāpaṭipajjantā’’ti pāṇo nahantabbo, sabbesattā averā hontūtiādinā sammāpaṭipajjantā. ‘‘Sabbalokiyasampattiyo’’ti dānasīlādīnaṃ puññakiriyavatthūnaṃ phalavipākabhūtā sabbalokiyasampattiyo. Sabbe ‘‘bodhisambhāradhamme’’ti dānapāramisīlapāramiādikepāramidhamme. ‘‘Ārādhentī’’ti sampādenti. ‘‘Micchāpaṭipajjantā’’ti duccarita durājīvamicchājīvādīnaṃ vasena micchāpaṭipajjantā. ‘‘Evaṃ mahantaṃ sammuti sacca’’nti etena ahaṃ paramattha saccamevagaṇhāmīti sammuti saccaṃ nabhinditabbaṃ. Bhindantohi sabbasampattīhi paribāhiro assāti dasseti. Kathañca taṃ bhindatīti. Satto nāma natthi. Sattassa bhavatosaṅkanti nāma natthi. Bhavanibbattakaṃ kusalākusalakammaṃ nāma natthīti gaṇhanto ucchedadiṭṭhiyaṃ tiṭṭhati. Sabbasampattīhi paribāhiro hoti. Apāya pūrako bhavatīti. ‘‘Vijjamānantveva gaṇhāpetī’’ti saññā cittadiṭṭhi vipallāsānaṃ vatthubhāvena gaṇhāpeti. Tenāha ‘‘sakkāyadiṭṭhī’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ viparītañhi sammutisacca’’nti etenasammuti saccamevadaḷhaṃ gahetvā paramattha saccaṃ nabhinditabbaṃ. Bhindantohi tāhi diṭṭhīhi namuccati. Kathañca taṃ bhindati. Khandhe vā khandhamuttakevā attajīve gahetvā teca attajīvā parammaraṇā ucchijjantīti gaṇhanto ucchedadiṭṭhiyaṃ tiṭṭhati. Te ca attajīvā bhavābhavesusassatā hutvā bhavatobhavaṃ saṃsaranti sandhāvantīti gaṇhantosassatadiṭṭhiyaṃ tiṭṭhati. ‘‘Navisaṃvādentī’’ti viparītaṃ nāpādenti. ‘‘Taṃ panā’’ti sabhāvasaccaṃ pana. Anubhavanabhedamattaṃ upādāyeva vedanā sukhāti vuttā. Sabbākārato sukhabhūtattā vedanā sukhāti vuttā nahoti. ‘‘Sabbāpivedanā dukkhā evā’’ti padhānattho. Tattha anubhavanabhedo tividho. Sātato vā anubhavanaṃ, assātato vā, majjhattato vā. ‘‘Dukkhā evā’’ti bhayaṭṭhena dukkhā eva. Bhayaṭṭhenāti ca saṃsāra bhayadassīhibhāyitabbaṭṭhena. Sukho vipāko yesaṃ te sukhavipākā. Tebhūmakakusalā. ‘‘Kusalasammatā’’ti etena sabhāvasaccepi etevohārā lokasammuti nissitāti dīpeti. ‘‘Sāsavatā’’ti āsavehi sahitabhāvo. ‘‘Saṃkilesi katā’’ti saṃkilesa dhammehi saṃyuttabhāvo. Oghehi ca yogehi ca upādānehi ca pattabbabhāvo ‘‘oghanīyayoganīya upādānīyatā’’. Adhikā attā ajjhattā. Bahiddhārukkherūpadhammārukkhassa attānāma sāraṭṭhena. Sākhāyaṃ rūpadhammā sākhāya attānāma sāraṭṭhena. Sattasantānapariyāpannā pana rūpārūpadhammā taṇhāpariggaha daḷhaṭṭhena tato bahiddhā attato adhikā attāti atthena ajjhattāti lokasammuti hoti. Tenāha ‘‘ajjhattatikañcā’’tiādiṃ. Dukkhanirodha maggabhāvo ca, iti idaṃ catukkaṃ ariyasaccaṃ nāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Idamevā’’ti idaṃ catukkameva. ‘‘Acalamāna’’nti etena ariyasaddassa atthaṃ dīpeti. Tebhūmaka dhammānaṃ sukhatā nāma calā hoti. Kasmā, anicca dhammattā. Te dhammesukhāti gahetvā attano ajjhattaṅgaṃ karontā acireneva dukkhaṃ pāpuṇanti. Te dhamme dukkhāti ñatvā tehivimuttā puna dukkhaṃ pāpuṇantīti natthi. Esanayo sesaariyasaccesu . ‘‘Tesū’’tiādimhi duvidhānihi saccānīti vuttesu dvīsu saccesu. ‘‘Tena vutta’’ntiādi laddhaguṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Yo vinā aññāpadesenā’’ti ettha aññāpadeso nāma aṭṭhadhamma samodhānaṃ nissāya ghaṭasaṇṭhānaṃ paññāyati, paṭasaṇṭhānaṃ paññāyati, taṃ saṇṭhānaṃ attano sabhāvena vinā aññāpadesena siddhaṃ hoti. Yāpanacintana kiriyā nāma atthi. Yaṃ cittanti vuccati. Sā aññāpadesena siddhā na hoti. Attano sabhāvenevasiddhā. Esanayo phusanakiriyā, vedayitakiriyā, dīsūti. Imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yovinā aññāpadesenā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Cittenaparikappetvā’’ti manoviññāṇa cittena avijjamānaṃ saṇṭhānaṃ vijjamānaṃ katvā. ‘‘Saviggahaṃ katvā’’ti sarīraṃ katvā. Vatthu dabbasahitaṃ katvāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Cittamayocittanimmito’’ti supinante diṭṭharūpāni viya cittenapakato cittena nimmito. Kasmā sabhāvasiddho paramattho nāmāti āha ‘‘sohī’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Santī’’ti etena asadhātu vasena atthoti siddhaṃ vuttaṃ. Saddābuddhīhi araṇīyato upagantabbato atthotipivadanti. ‘‘Itarato’’ti parikappasiddhato. ‘‘Paramo’’ti adhiko. Tenāha ‘‘ukkaṃsagato’’ti. Etena paramasaddassa adhikatthaṃ vadati. Idāni tassa uttamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādivuttaṃ. Tattha, imasmiṃ buddhasāsane pañcasāsana kiccāni mahantāni abhiññeyyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhijānanaṃ. Pariññeyyānaṃ parijānanaṃ. Pahātabbānaṃ pahānaṃ. Sacchi kātabbānaṃ sacchikaraṇaṃ. Bhāvetabbānaṃ bhāvanāti. Tattha sabbepi paramattha dhammā abhiññeyyā nāma. Dukkha saccadhammā pariññeyyā nāma. Samudaya saccadhammā pahātabbā nāma. Sāmaññapphalāni ca nibbānañca sacchikātabbā nāma. Maggasaccadhammā bhāvetabbā nāma. Tesu dhammesu tesaṃ kiccānaṃ siddhiyā imasmiṃ sāsane sāsanakiccaṃ siddhaṃ hoti. Niṭṭhānaṃ gacchati. Te ca dhammā eva rūpānaṃ sāsana kiccānaṃ avirādhakattā avisaṃvādakattā uttamaṭṭhena paramatthā nāma hontīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘ye’’tiyejanā. ‘‘Aya’’nti ayaṃ dhammo. ‘‘Tassā’’ti tassaabhiññeyyassa, tassapariññeyyassa, tassapahātabbassa, tassasacchikā tabbassa tassabhāvetabbassāti sambandho. Paramatthavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
“那个不美”,从字面上说,就是不美。不只是字面上不美,从意义上说也同样不美。四圣谛之法,即使是独觉佛的智慧也能以它们为行境;而五种所知之法,则只有一切知智才能以它们为行境。其中,四圣谛之法就是究竟法;五种所知之法则是一切究竟法连同一切施设。一切知佛对四圣谛的现觉,是连同法施设一起成就的;独觉佛对四圣谛的现觉,则不连同法施设一起成就。因此,他们不能从自己所证悟的四圣谛之法中抽取出名相施设之后,再为别人开示。他们的四圣谛现觉,就像哑巴做梦一样——注释书里是这样说的。因此,只有连同施设的五种所知之法,才可以说是一切知智的行境。
‘‘Taṃ nasundara’’nti byañjanato nasundaraṃ. Nakevalaṃ byañjanatoyeva nasundaraṃ, atthatopi nasundarameva. Catusacca dhammāhi paccekabuddhaññāṇassapi gocarā honti. Pañcañeyya dhammā pana sabbaññutaññāṇasseva. Tattha catusacca dhammā nāma paramattha dhammā eva. Pañcañeyyadhammā pana sabba paññattiyā saha sabbaparamattha dhammā. Sabbaññubuddhānaṃ catusaccābhi sambodho dhamma paññattiyā saha sijjhati. Paccekabuddhānaṃ catusacca sambodho dhammapaññattiyā saha nasijjhati. Tasmā te sayaṃ paṭividdhaṃ catusacca dhammaṃ nāma paññattiṃ nīharitvā paresaṃ desetuṃ na sakkonti. Tesaṃ catusaccasambodho mūgassa supinadassanaṃ viya hotīti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Tasmā paññattiyā saha pañca ñeyya dhammā eva sabbaññutaññāṇassa gocarāti sakkāvattunti.
1313. 关于“心”这个词的解释。因为如果没有所缘,它就不可能存在。当说“思惟”时,问“思惟什么?”回答“思惟所缘”,这样一来,如果没有作为所缘的宾格词,就不可能成立。因此,这里应当理解为“思惟”,由此应当知道它的名称得以成立——这就是句子的关联。在“闻所成智、思所成智”中,也存在对所缘真实本质的思惟,而那本身就是慧,为了排除这一点,所以说“所缘……唯是获得”。心、意、意根、识,这一切都是心的名称。它是系属于所缘缘的,不是系属于其他缘,也不是由其他缘而获得的名称。为了表明:对于这种被称为“了知所缘”的别义,它并不能使人理解,所以说“在存在中……”等。为了表明“以此”这个词,是在说作者行为成就中最有辅助作用的工具格,所以说“因为那个……”等。“唯思惟”中的“唯”字,是排除修饰的意义,由此用“因为一切……”等来显示被排除的意义。“分别身”或指身体。依赖于缘的,就是“缘所支配的”。“支配”就是关联。“转起”就是作用,或者生起,或者住立。这些法的转起是缘所支配的,所以叫“缘所支配的转起者”。“以力……”等是互相的同义词。“从主要的角度,唯有一种行为成就可得”——这是就诸法各自唯是作用而言的。然而,那些唯是作用的法,自身或是依于多种缘而住于事物中,或是依于多种缘所生的事物而住。因此,在胜义的解释中,也随宜允许获得其他那些成就。否则,在因缘、所缘缘、俱生缘、依止缘等中,行为成就怎么能合理呢?“从主要的角度”就是从根本的角度。“对无分别的思惟作分别”——这是就“思惟故为心”这种作者成就而说的。“小石臼的”——指研磨药根的小石臼。它并没有一个名为“身体”的独立部分。将本无分别的说成有分别,而称为“小石臼的身体”。这种对无分别作分别,就是“非真实的存在”。有需要时才应说,无需要时不应说,所以说“如此造作……”等。其中,“由他人构想出来的”——指由其他外道师所构思的。“若有我……的构想”——如果有我存在,我思惟,因此应说“我名为心”等。不应说“思惟故为心”,因为心唯是作用,并没有一个名为“我”等的作者。因此,唯将作用当作作者,而说“思惟故为心”。由此可知,世间并没有“我”等作者。这就是对无分别作分别构想的目的所在。“以我为主导”——在行为成就的众多作者中,自己成为主导、自己成为最上者。“那个作者状态”——世间共许的作者状态。“再者,工具状态”——再者,世间共许的工具状态。如此显示了心的释义后,现在为了显示它的称义,而说“又,在此……”等。正如那些畜生道的众生,其心是奇妙的。如此,心是奇妙的,若有任何其他存在,我亦不见有任何一个同类的——这是句子的连接。“同类”指众生的种类群体。“是处格的工具格”——指在“从……出离”的意义上的工具格。由此,说“从彼转起故为心”的意义。在偈颂中:“彼彼自性”——即了知、触等自性,如火的热性。“作用成就之味”——即各个法以之作工具的作用,以及完成该作用后所获得的成就之味。如火在事物中的烧煮作用,以及照明之味。“可被执取的行相”——即能被智所执取的、作为各个法之旗帜的行相。成就之味即被称为“作用成就之味”。“或果”——或指结果,如火的烟。“近因”——指在自己无间地产生果的因,如火的生火之人。“能”——即有能力。“对于智者”——对于具有殊胜智慧的智者。“前导之味”——在执取所缘中,以主导作用为味。“连结之现起”——以无间断转起的行相为现起。“名色为足处”——触等名,以及事色,是心的足处。
13. Cittavacanatthe. Nahi sā ārammaṇenavinā labbhati. Cintetīti vutte kiṃ cinteti, ārammaṇaṃ cintetīti evaṃ ārammaṇabhūtena kammapadena vinā asambhavato. Tasmā idha cintanāti daṭṭhabbā, tasmā assa nāmaṃ siddhanti daṭṭhabbanti sambandho. Sutamayaññāṇaṃ, cintāmayaññāṇa, nti ettha ārammaṇassa bhūtasabhāva cintāpi atthi, sāpaññāevāti taṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘ārammaṇa…pe… ṇūpaladdhiyevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Cittaṃ, mano, mānasaṃ, viññāṇa, nti sabbaṃ cittassa nāmaṃ. Ārammaṇa paccayappaṭibaddhaṃ hoti. Na aññapaccayappaṭibaddhaṃ. Na ca aññapaccayena laddhaṃ nāmaṃ. Evarūpassa ārammaṇa vijānana saṅkhātassa atthantarassabodhakaṃ nahotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘santesu cā’’tiādivuttaṃ. ‘‘Etenā’’ti idaṃ kattuno kiriyāsādhane atissayūpakārakaṃ karaṇa sādhanaṃ vadatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘tañhī’’tiādivuttaṃ. ‘‘Cintanamatta’’nti ettha mattasaddo visesanivatti atthoti, tena nivattitaṃ atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘sabbepihī’’tiādinā. ‘‘Viggaho vā’’ti sarīraṃ vā. Paccayena āyattā paccayāyattā. ‘‘Āyattā’’ti sambandhā. Vattanaṃ vutti. Uppajjanaṃ vā ṭhiti vā. Paccayāyattā vutti etesanti ‘‘paccayāyatta vuttino’’. ‘‘Thāmenā’’tiādi aññamaññavevacanāni. ‘‘Ekaṃ bhāvasādhanameva padhānato labbhatī’’ti idaṃ dhammānaṃ taṃ taṃ kiriyā mattabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kiriyāmattabhūtāpi pana te dhammāsayaṃ nānāpaccayā vatthāyaṃ ṭhitā vā honti nānāpaccayuppannāvatthāyaṃ ṭhitā vā. Tasmā paramattha padesupi yathārahaṃ tadaññasādhanānaṃ paṭilābho avārito hoti. Itarathā hetu paccayo, ārammaṇa paccayo, sahajātapaccayo, nissayapaccayotiādīsu kathaṃ bhāvasādhanaṃ yuttaṃ siyāti. ‘‘Padhānato’’ti mukhyato. ‘‘Abhedassa cintanassabhedakaraṇa’’nti idaṃ cintetīti cittantikataṃ kattusādhanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Silāputtakassā’’ti bhesajjamūlānaṃ pisanasilāpotakassa. Tassa sarīraṃ nāma visuṃ aṅgaṃ natthi. Abhinnaṃpi bhinnaṃ katvā vuccati ‘‘silāputtakasarīra’’nti. Idaṃ abhedassabhedakaraṇaṃ nāma abhūtarūpaṃ hoti. Payojane sati vattabbaṃ, asati na vattabbanti āha ‘‘tathākaraṇañcā’’tiādiṃ. Tattha ‘‘paraparikappitassā’’ti parehi aññatitthā cariyehi paricintitassa. ‘‘Satihi…pe… kappanāyā’’ti sace attā atthi, attā cinteti, tasmā attā cittonāmātiādi vattabbaṃ. Na vattabbaṃ cintetīti cittanti, cittassa kiriyāmattattā. Na pana attādiko kattā nāma atthi. Tasmā kiriyā mattameva kattāraṃ katvā ‘‘cintetīti citta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tena viññāyatiloke attādikokattā nāma natthīti. Idaṃ abhedassabheda parikappanāya payojananti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Attappadhāno’’ti kiriyāsādhane bahūnaṃkārakānaṃ majjhe sayaṃpadhāno sayaṃjeṭṭhako hutvā. ‘‘Taṃkattubhāva’’nti lokesiddhaṃ kattubhāvaṃ. ‘‘Puna karaṇabhāva’’nti puna loke siddhaṃ karaṇabhāvaṃ. Evaṃ cittassa vacanatthaṃ dassetvā idāni tassa abhidhānatthaṃ dassento ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādimāha. Yathayidaṃ ye ime tiracchānagatā pāṇā cittāvicittā. Evaṃ cittaṃ vicittaṃ yaṃ aññaṃ atthi, taṃ aññaṃ ekanikāyaṃpi nasamanupassāmī-ti yojanā. ‘‘Nikāya’’nti sattajātisamū haṃ .‘‘Nissakke karaṇavacana’’nti vibhattāpādānatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Etena tato caraṇato cittatoti atthaṃ vadati. Gāthāyaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ taṃ sabhāvo’’ti vijānanaphusanādiko sabhāvo, aggissauṇhoviya. ‘‘Kiccasampattiyoraso’’ti tena tena dhammena karaṇakiccañca, taṃ kiccaṃ katvā laddho sampattiguṇo ca. Aggissa vatthumhi paripācanakiccaṃ viya, obhāsanaguṇoviya ca. ‘‘Gayhākāro’’ti ñāṇena gahetabbo tassa tassa dhammassa dhajabhūto ākāro. Sampatti rasoyeva vuccati. ‘‘Phalaṃvāpī’’ti kāriyapphalaṃ vāpi, aggissa dhūmoviya. ‘‘Āsannakāraṇa’’nti attano anantare phalanibbattakaṃ kāraṇaṃ, aggissa aggikāraka puriso viya. ‘‘Ala’’nti samatthā. ‘‘Vibuddhino’’ti visesabuddhi sampannassa paṇḍitassa. ‘‘Pubbaṅgamarasa’’nti ārammaṇaggahaṇe padhānarasa kiccaṃ. ‘‘Sandhāna paccupaṭṭhāna’’nti nirantarappavattākārapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Nāma rūpapadaṭṭhāna’’nti phassādināmañca vatthu rūpañcacittassapadaṭṭhānaṃ.
14“在心中”是指心中生起。“由此而成就”是连接语。“那正是触等的生起,那正是触等的衰老”等等,应这样连接。“系于同一茎上”,是指被同一根茎杆系住。“系于同一生等”,是指被同一生的说法系住。“若”是假设词,“不”是不应说的。在偈颂中,“法”是指名蕴诸法。“唯以意”,是指唯以作为行为者的意。“被造作”,是指被令生起。“被化作”,是指被产生出来。“唯是心之作用所成”:了知所缘的心,是在生起接触的样态之后才了知,那个接触的样态就叫做触。然而其余所有心所法,都是依触而生起的。因为经中说:“以触为因、以触为缘,对受蕴、想蕴、行蕴生起执取。”即便如此,由于这些法以心为根本、依止于心,所以也唯是心之作用所成。“以此”,是指以此偈句。而在《分别论》中,仅以同一所缘这一点来说明。其意旨是:具足的心所支分,后面长老自己将会说到。但这里是解释词义的地方,所以用具足的支分来说明是合适的,因此说“那并不善巧”。“于所依处”,是指腹部、胎膜等处。“种种心所造作”,是指象、马等形象。仅仅了知就是心,不能说它是善或不善。因为正是与种种心所结合,才那样说。这一点世尊已经说过:“诸比丘,此心极光净,而彼为客随烦恼所染污。”因此说“心如水等”。
14. ‘‘Cetasi bhava’’nti cittasmiṃ pātubhūtaṃ. ‘‘Etena siddhā hontī’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Sā eva phassādīnaṃ jāti. Yācittassajarā, sā eva phassādīnaṃjarā’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Ekavaṇṭūpani bandhānī’’ti ekena vaṇṭadaṇḍakena upanibandhāni. ‘‘Ekajātiyādi upanibandhā’’ti ekajātikathā divasena upanibandhā. ‘‘Ce’’ti cevadeyya. ‘‘Nā’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Gāthāyaṃ. ‘‘Dhammā’’ti nāmakkhandha dhammā. ‘‘Manasā evā’’ti kattubhūtena manena eva. ‘‘Pakatā’’ti pavattitā. ‘‘Nimmitā’’ti nipphāditā. ‘‘Cittakiriyā bhūtā evā’’ti ārammaṇaṃ vijānantaṃ cittaṃ phusanākāraṃ janetvāva vijānāti. So phusanākāro phassoti vuccati. Avasesā pana sabbepi cetasikadhammā phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjanti. Phasso hetu phasso paccayo vedanākkhandhassa upādāya. Saññākkhandhassa. Saṅkhārakkhandhassa upādāyāti hi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi cittamūlakattā cittanissitattā ca tepidhammā cittakiri yābhūtā eva hontīti. ‘‘Etenā’’ti etenagāthāpadena. Vibhāvaniyaṃ pana ekālambaṇatā mattena vibhāveti. Paripuṇṇāni ce tasikaṅgāni upari therena sayameva vakkhamānattāti adhippāyo. Idha pana padatthavibhāvanaṭṭhānattā paripuṇṇehi aṅgehi vibhāvetuṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘taṃ nasundara’’nti. ‘‘Vatthumhī’’ti paṭakoṭṭhakādimhi. ‘‘Nānācittakammānī’’ti hatthi assarūpādīni. Vijānanamattaṃ cittaṃ, kusalanti vā akusalanti vā vattabbaṃ natthi. Nānācetasike hi yuttattā eva tathā vattabbaṃ hoti. Vuttaṃhetaṃ bhagavatā. Pabhassaramidaṃ bhikkhave cittaṃ. Tañca kho āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭhanti. Tenāha ‘‘udakaṃ viyacitta’’ntiādiṃ.
15“被损害”这个词,是依作者、依因、依业处而成立的。为了说明“损害”就是遭受变异,所以说了“以冷热等”等话。其中,“依不平衡转起之力”,就是依诸界不平衡转起之力。这是依界的作用力而说的意思。“以何而损害”中,“以何”应看作表因或表作者的工具格。在“以冷”等中也是如此。所谓蚊虻,就是针口的小蝇和大蝇。所谓风,就是东风等。所谓热,就是太阳的热。所谓爬虫,就是蛇、蝎、蜈蚣等。与它们接触也会被损害,或者走向死亡,或者感受接近死亡程度的苦。“那些法”,指十二种有对色法。“其他”,指十六种无对色及无色法。“于其中”,是简别依格。现在,结合根本损害与圣典文句,说“会合”等。会合就是指互相撞击,这是关联。除去现前而来及作为所缘,这是连结。“或是诸大种本身”,即除水界外的三大种本身。说了“遭受变异”后,开显其义,所以说“在那刹那”等。“它们自身也成为变异者”,意思是那些大种自身也舍弃原有常态,达到过小或过大的状态。“以及过小过大的色相续”,是就辗转生起的色相续而言。如此,依圣典理趣,以破坏力说损害后,现在,无论是破坏还是成就,前际后际相续中成为不相似转起的变异。然而,在此之后,又说“然而在此”等。问:以撞击之力的损害,只是那些以现前而来等之力而损害的法,还是以撞击之力而损害的自性色法?答:它们是有形色的,即具有实体和形状的形态。为什么呢?因为它们是粗大的自性。因为众多色聚在一刹那以一体结合的状态而转起。无色法则具有细、微细的自性。即使百千个聚集在一起转起,也不会成为实体形状的状态。而且在一个有情相续中,一刹那只有一聚转起。为什么呢?因为依无间缘的系属而转起。所以它们不是有形色的。然而色法是粗大的自性,众多积聚能成为实体形状之因,一刹那也有许多色聚以一体结合而转起,所以它们是有形色的。
15. Ruppatīti padaṃ kattarivāhetukammanivāsiddhaṃ. Ruppanañcavikārāpatti evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sītuṇhādīhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘visamappavattivasenā’’ti dhātūnaṃ visamappavattivasena. Dhātukkho bhavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti, ‘‘kenaruppatī’’ti ettha ‘‘kenā’’ti hetu atthevā hetu kattarivā karaṇavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā sītenātiādīsupi. Ḍaṃsamakasā nāma sūcimukhā khuddakamakkhikāceva mahanta makkhikā ca. Vātā nāma puratthimavātādayo. Ātapo nāma sūriyātapo. Sariṃsapānāma ahi vicchika satapadikādayo. Tesaṃ samphassehipi ruppati. Maraṇaṃ vā gacchati, maraṇa mattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ. ‘‘Ye dhammā’’ti dvādasavidhā sappaṭigharūpadhammā. ‘‘Aññesa’’nti soḷasannaṃ appaṭigharūpānañca arūpadhammānañca. ‘‘Tesū’’ti niddhāraṇebhummaṃ. Idāni pāḷiyā saddhiṃ mukhyaruppanaṃ saṃsandento ‘‘samāgamo cā’’tiādimāha. Samāgamo ca nāma aññamaññābhighaṭṭanaṃ vuccatīti sambandho. Āpātāgamanañca ārammaṇakaraṇañca ṭhapetvāti yojanā. ‘‘Mahābhūtānameva vā’’ti āpodhātu vajjitānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ mahābhūtānameva vā. ‘‘Vikāraṃ āpajjatī’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘yasmiṃ khaṇe’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Sayaṃpi vikārapattā hontī’’ti temahābhūtāsayaṃpi pakatiṃ vijahitvā omattādhimattabhāvaṃ pāpuṇantīti attho. ‘‘Omattādhimattarūpasantatīnañcā’’ti paramparato uppajjamānā rūpasantatiyo sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pāḷinayena vipattivasena ruppanaṃ vatvā idāni vipatti vā hotu, sampatti vā. Purimapacchi masantatīnaṃ visadisappavattibhūto vikāropi ekena pariyāyena ruppanaṃnāmāti katvā puna taṃ ruppanaṃ dassento ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Ghaṭṭanavasena ruppana dhammāna mevā’’ti āpātāgamanādivasena ruppanadhammehivinā abhighaṭṭanavasenaruppana sabhāvānaṃ rūpadhammānameva siddhanti pucchā. ‘‘Saviggahā hontī’’ti dabba saṇṭhānākārasahitā honti. Kasmā, oḷārikasabhāvattā. Bahūnañcarūpakalāpānaṃ ekakkhaṇe ekābaddhabhāvenapavattattā. Arūpadhammāhi saṇhasukhumasabhāvā ca honti. Sace anekasatasahassānipi ekato pavatteyyuṃ. Dabbasaṇṭhānabhāvaṃ nagamissantiyeva. Ekasmiñca sattasantāne ekakkhaṇe eka kalāpova pavattati. Kasmā, anantara paccayūpanibandhena pavattattā. Tasmāte saviggahāna honti. Rūpadhammā pana oḷārika sabhāvā ca honti. Bahūnaṃ sannicayesati dabbasaṇṭhānatthāya saṃvattanti. Ekakkhaṇe ca bahukalāpāpi ekābaddhāhutvā pavattanti. Tasmā tesaviggahāhontīti.
“以能摄取冷等之力”,意思是:依世间现前可见、明显的“冷”等说法之力,说“被冷所恼、被热所恼”等等。那句话要说明的是:世间不明显的无色法之“恼”,才是这里所意指的。这就是其意旨。“名为言说”,是说名为名称、名为想。“依世间通称”,是依多数人的通称、言说、表述。“唯依明显的相之因”,是唯依明显的、引发那言词的相之因。“即使不摄取冷等”:这里的“pi”字也显示“即使依摄取冷等之力”。即便如此,也并非处处都能找到经文作为佐证。应当知道:依明显之相的言说,才是一切处所共通的。“彼附随之遮止”,即遮止那些无色法成为色的附随。“依神变示现之力而转起”:这里,所谓神变示现,就是作出种种神通形态。“色性之成立”,即名为“色”的想之成立。“然而此”,即然而此色。“依能助益的冷等之力”:经文中虽然也有依能损害的冷等而说的冷等言词,但那些在梵天界并不存在,只有能作助益的才存在。这是依它们而说的意思。“经中所指示的”,即“诸比丘,因为认知,所以称为想。认知什么呢?也认知青、也认知黄……”以及“诸比丘,因为了别,所以称为识。了别什么呢?也了别甜、也了别酸……”这些经中所指示的内容。
‘‘Sītādiggahaṇasāmatthiyenā’’ti sītenapi ruppati, uṇhenapi ruppatītiādinā lokassa paccakkhato pākaṭassa sītādivacanassasāmatthiyena. Tañhi vacanaṃ lokassa apākaṭaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ ruppanaṃ idhanādhippetanti dīpetīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Vohāro nāmā’’ti nāmasaññā nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Lokopacārenā’’ti bahujanassa upacārena vohārena kathanena. ‘‘Pākaṭa nimittavasenevā’’ti pākaṭassa saddappavattinimittassa vaseneva. ‘‘Sītādiggahaṇena vināpī’’ti pisaddena sītādiggahaṇasāmatthiyenapīti dīpeti. Evaṃ santepi pāḷisādhakaṃ nāma na sakkāsabbattha laddhuṃ. Pākaṭanimitta vacanameva sabbattha sādhāraṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Tappasaṅganivattī’’ti tassa arūpadhammānaṃ rūpatāpasaṅgassa nivatti. ‘‘Iddhivikubbanāvasappavattā’’ti ettha iddhivikubbanānāmaiddhiyānānappakāramāpanaṃ. ‘‘Rūpatā siddhī’’ti rūpanti nāma saññāsiddhi. ‘‘Idaṃ panā’’ti idaṃ rūpaṃ pana. ‘‘Anuggahānaṃ sītādīnaṃ vasenā’’ti kiñcāpipāḷiyaṃ sītādivacanaṃ upaghātakānaṃ sītādīnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Teca brahmaloke natthi. Anuggāhakā eva atthi. Tesaṃvasenāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Pāḷiyaṃ niddiṭṭhānī’’ti sañjānātīti kho bhikkhave tasmā saññāti vuccati. Kiñca sañjānāti. Nīlaṃpi sañjānāti, pītampi sañjānātī-tiādinā ca, vijānātīti kho bhikkhave tasmā viññāṇanti vuccati. Kiñca vijānāti. Madhuraṃpi vijānāti, ambilaṃpi vijānātī-tiādinā ca-pāḷiyaṃ niddiṭṭhāni.
1616. 涅槃一词的解释。“诸蕴”:将在别的生命形态、恶趣等处存在的诸蕴,也就是那些种种轮转苦、热恼之法。因为过去诸法并不叫作“涅槃”,它们已经逼迫有情之后灭尽了——这是本意。现在诸法此刻正在逼迫,未来必定生起的诸蕴将来也会逼迫,它们怎么能叫“涅槃”呢?因此说“于现在诸法……中间省略……实在没什么可说的”。“依境之地”:就是以境为所依处的地方。所谓境为所依处,并不像“人们走到人间去”这类说法里的主要依处那样。但是离开这个依处,那个离涅槃、于未来有中的诸蕴之不再结生之状态,也就是圣者们不再结生的状态,就无法完成。因此,为了说明它是被假想为所依处的所依处,说了“如虚空”等语。正如鸟类的飞行作用,离开虚空便不能在别处完成;同样,为了说明轮转苦诸法的寂灭作用,离开涅槃也不能在别处完成,说了“若他们”等语。其中,“若他们”指那些种种轮转苦、热恼之法。“hi”是语助词。“te”是修辞用语。“离彼”即离涅槃。所谓寂灭之处并不存在。因此,涅槃就是他们寂灭作用的所依处——这是本意。正如这盏灯熄灭,同样,智者们涅槃——这样连接。“那那烦恼的”指他们相续中的烦恼。“诸蕴的”指未来有中的诸蕴。“不再结生之状态”指圣者们达到相续不再结生的状态。正如在道中见到业格用法:“以此修行,我必将从老死中解脱”等语中。涅槃中并非如此,因此说了“如道”等语。涅槃中只见到处格用法,如“于彼处名与色无余灭尽”等语中。因此,涅槃中不见业格用法,因为业格相本身不存在——为了说明这一点,说了“而涅槃不”等语。业格相名为作者的合作缘状态。难道不是在无余涅槃界中“他们涅槃”吗?确实如此,但那里是在修饰语中的业格用法,不是业格作者。因为那是为了说明有余涅槃界的灭尽而说的。
16. Nibbānapade. ‘‘Khandhāvā’’ti bhavantare apāyādīsu bhavissamānā khandhāvā. Na hi atīta dhammā, nibbāyanti nāma, satte pīḷetvā niruddhattāti adhippāyo. Paccuppannā ca dhammā etarahi pīḷenti, avassaṃ uppajjamānā anāgatadhammā ca anāgate pīḷessanti, kathaṃ te nibbāyanti nāmāti āha ‘‘paccuppannesu…pe… vattabbameva natthī’’ti. ‘‘Visayebhumma’’nti visayādhārebhummaṃ. Visayādhāro nāmamanussābhūmiyaṃ gacchantītiādīsu viya mukhyādhāro nahoti. Tena pana vinā aññattha taṃ kiriyaṃ kātuṃ nasakkoti. Tasmā ādhārabhāvena parikappito ādhāroti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāākāse’’tiādivuttaṃ. Yathā sakuṇānaṃ pakkhana kiriyā nāma ākāsena vinā aññattha nasijjhati. Tathā vaṭṭadukkhadhammānaṃ nibbuti kiriyāpi nibbānena vinā aññattha nasijjhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yehite’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘ye’’ti yetividhavaṭṭadukkhasantāpadhammā. Hisaddonipāto. Tesaddo vacanālaṅkāro. ‘‘Tabbinimutta’’nti nibbānavinimuttaṃ. Nibbutiṭhānaṃ nāma natthi. Tasmā nibbānaṃ tesaṃ nibbuti kiriyāya visayā dhārohotīti adhippāyo. Yathā ayaṃ padīpo nibbāyati. Tathādhīrā nibbantīti yojanā. ‘‘Taṃ taṃ kilesānaṃ vā’’ti te saṃtesaṃkilesānaṃ vā. ‘‘Khandhānaṃ vā’’ti anāgatabhavesu khandhānaṃ vā. ‘‘Punaappaṭisandhikabhāva’’nti santānassa puna paṭisandhānābhāvaṃ pāpuṇanti ariyā janā. Yathā magge karaṇavacanaṃ dissati addhā imāyapaṭipattiyā jarāmaraṇamhā parimuccissāmītiādīsu. Na tathā nibbāneti āha ‘‘maggeviyā’’tiādiṃ. Nibbānepanabhummavacanameva dissati yatthanāmañcarūpañca. Asesaṃ uparujjhatītiādīsu. Tasmā nibbāne karaṇa vacanaṃ na dissati, karaṇa lakkhaṇasseva abhāvatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘na ca nibbāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Karaṇa lakkhaṇaṃ nāmakattuno sahakārī paccayabhāvo. Nanu anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā nibbāyantīti dissatīti. Saccaṃ, tattha pana visesane karaṇa vacanaṃ. Na karaṇakārake. Tañhi saupādisesanibbānadhātuyānivattanatthaṃ vuttanti.
1818. 在欲界这个词的解释中。“Kāmīyatī”的意思是被欲求。关于它的相、味、现起、足处,在《中部注》里有记载。“Tekāmīyantī”的意思是,他们——无间地狱等处——被欲求。“Tattha uppannānampī”的意思是,即使生在无间地狱等处的众生。“Bhavanikanti nāma hotī”的意思是,把称为“有”的自蕴执取为“这是我的,我是这个,这是我的我”,这种渴爱就叫“有欲”。它也存在地狱众生之中。“Kāme avacaratī”的意思是,属于欲界,包含在欲界中。即使生于色界、无色界,也不称为色界、无色界,只称为欲界,只算作欲界,意思是只进入欲的计数中。“Tīsubhavesu uppannānipī”的意思是,即使生于欲有、色有、无色有三有众生相续中的法,也不属于那些地,而是不属于那些地,这是意图。“Kāmāvacaratāpattidoso”的意思是,若应说为欲界法却未如此说,便犯过失。“Rūpāvacaratādimuttidoso”的意思是,应如此说:“这些不是色界法,不是无色界法,不是出世间法”,若不这么说便犯过失。这是“rūpārūpāvacaratāpatti doso kāmāvacaratāmutti doso”等句中的方法。即使取 avacara 一词为“已生”之义,这些过失也不犯。为什么?因为在世间,多分说、多数说也存在。为了说明这个道理,说了“nanuyebhūyya vuttivasenapī”等。其中,“kesañcī”是指某些人或多法的。譬如猎鹿人虽在村中行走,但因多在林中行走,就得到“林行者”之名。国王的象虽在别处行走,但因多在战场行走,就得到“战场行者”之名。这名为多分说。又如某林中虽有芒果树,也有其他树,但因芒果树多,那片林就得到“芒果林”之名。如是于木棉林等也是如此。这名为多数说。在这里,地以多数说而得到欲界、色界、无色界之名,法以多分说而得到欲界法等名。这样取时,那些过失就不犯。为了显示这个道理,说了“tasmā idhapi…pe… dosotī”等。“Nā”是没有过失,意思是确实没有。“Tasmāssā”中,“assā”是指 avacara 一词。“Tathā atthaṃ aggahetvā”是不取“已生”之义。“Pariggāhiniyā kāmataṇhāya kato”是像那样由执取的欲爱所作,因是欲爱的行境、所缘,所以名为由渴爱所作。由此,“kāmetīti kāmo”是欲爱;“avacarati etthāti avacaraṃ”;“kāmassa avacaranti kāmāvacaraṃ”;因是欲爱的行境、所缘,所以是欲界,这个意思也成立。
18. Kāmāvacarapade. ‘‘Kāmīyatī’’ti icchīyati. Nimittassādavatthu majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgataṃ. ‘‘Tekāmīyantī’’ti te avīcinirayādayo icchīyanti. ‘‘Tattha uppannānampī’’ti avīcinirayādīsu uppannānaṃpi sattānaṃ. ‘‘Bhavanikanti nāma hotī’’ti bhavasaṅkhātaṃ attano khandhaṃ etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, esome attāti gaṇhantī taṇhā bhavanikanti nāma. Sā nerayikasattānaṃpi atthiyeva. ‘‘Kāme avacaratī’’ti kāmepariyāpannaṃ hoti. Kāme antogadhaṃ hoti. Rūpārūpabhūmīsu uppannaṃpi rūpārūpasaṅkhyaṃ nagacchati. Kāmasaṅkhyameva gacchati. Kāmagaṇanamevagacchatīti attho. ‘‘Tīsubhavesu uppannānipī’’ti kāmarūpārūpasattasantānesu uppannānipi na tatrapariyā pannāneva honti. Tatra apariyāpannāneva hontīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Kāmāvacaratāpattidoso’’ti kāmāvacara dhammāti vattabbatā pattidoso. ‘‘Rūpāvacaratādimuttidoso’’ti ime rūpāvacara dhammā na honti, arūpāvacara dhammā na honti, lokuttara dhammā na hontīti evaṃ vattabbatāpatti dosoti vuttaṃ hoti. Esanayo ‘‘rūpārūpāvacaratāpatti doso kāmāvacaratāmutti doso’’ tipadesu . Avacarasaddassa uppannatthe gahitepi etedosā nāpajjanti. Kasmā, loke yebhūyyanayatabbahulanayānaṃpi sabbhāvāti imamatthaṃ vadanto ‘‘nanuyebhūyya vuttivasenapī’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘kesañcī’’ti kesañci puggalānaṃ vā dhammānaṃ vā. Yathāmigaluddako gāme carantopi vane caraṇabahulattā vanacarakoti nāmaṃ labhati. Rājahatthī aññattha carantopi saṅgāme caraṇabahulattā saṅgāmāvacaroti nāmaṃ labhati. Ayaṃ yebhūyyanayo nāma. Yasmiṃ vane ambarukkhāpi atthi, aññarukkhāpi atthi. Ambarukkhabahulattā pana taṃ vanaṃ ambavananti nāmaṃ labhati. Evaṃ simbalivanādīsu. Ayaṃ tabbahulanayo. Idha pana bhūmiyo tabbahulanayena kāmarūpārūpa nāmaṃ labhanti, dhammā yebhūyyanayena kāmāvacarādi nāmaṃ labhantīti. Evaṃ gahite sati, te dosānā pajjantīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā idhapi…pe… dosotī’’tiāha. ‘‘Nā’’ti na kocidoso natthi. Atthi evāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Tasmāssā’’ti ettha ‘‘assā’’ti avacarasaddassa. ‘‘Tathā atthaṃ aggahetvā’’ti uppajjanatthaṃ aggahetvā. ‘‘Pariggāhiniyā kāmataṇhāya kato’’ti tathā pariggāhiniyā kāmataṇhāya gocaravisayattātāyataṇhāya katonāma hoti. Etena kāmetīti kāmo, kāmataṇhā. Avacarati etthāti avacaraṃ. Kāmassa avacaranti kāmāvacaraṃ. Kāma taṇhāya gocaravisayattā kāmāvacaranti ayamatthopi sijjhati.
“在色中活动”就是色界。“在色中”指在十六种色地中。“活动”指以属于那里的方式生起。“在无色中活动”就是无色界。“在无色中”指在四种无色地中。“活动”指以属于那里的方式生起。这段话说的就是“在色界、无色界中也可以类推这个道理”。
色中的存在就是色,即色爱。无色中的存在就是无色,即无色爱。色的活动范围是色界,无色的活动范围是无色界。这是通过“然而在那些当中”等语句所说明的含义。
“在此处”指在这个地方。虽然贪、染、欲、爱都是贪的同义词,但因为色贪和无色贪被分开说明,所以这里用“欲”这个词来指除它们之外的贪。“一切贪”应当理解为也包括与常见、断见相应的贪。
Rūpeavacaratīti rūpāvacaraṃ. ‘‘Rūpe’’ti soḷasavidhāyarūpabhūmiyā. ‘‘Avacaratī’’ti tattha pariyāpannabhāvena pavattati. Arūpe avacaratīti arūpāvacaraṃ. ‘‘Arūpe’’ti catubbidhāya arūpabhūmiyā. ‘‘Avacaratī’’ti tattha pariyāpannabhāvena pavattatīti imamatthaṃ vadati ‘‘rūpārūpāvacaresupi ayaṃnayo netabbo’’ti. Rūpe bhavo rūpaṃ. Rūpataṇhā. Arūpe bhavo arūpaṃ, arūpataṇhā. Rūpassa avacaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ. Arūpassa avacaraṃ arūpāvacaranti imamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘tesu panā’’tiādinā. ‘‘Atrā’’ti imasmiṃ ṭhāne. Yadipi lobho, rāgo, kāmo, taṇhā, tisabbampetaṃ lobhassavevacanaṃ hoti. Rūparāgo arūparāgoti pana visuṃ vibhattattā idha kāmasaddena taṃ daññolobho gayhati. ‘‘Sabbopi lobho’’ti etenasassatuccheda diṭṭhisahagatopi saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
19“色、无色之名在那些地中已经惯用”,意思是它们以无相的方式而惯用。现在说明有相的方法,即从“再者”等开始。所谓“依处转用”,是指以处所来转用,比如“全村来了”。“依止转用”是指以依止于处所者来转用,比如“旗帜来了”。“凡在此中间”,是指凡在这中间的五蕴、界、处。也就是:任何色、任何受、任何想、任何行、任何识——这样连接理解。“极为明了”,是说因为通过多分等理路而不混乱,所以极为纯净。“以散乱有何用”,意思是以心的散乱有什么用呢。
19. ‘‘Rūpārūpasaddā tāsu bhūmīsu niruḷhā’’ti animittā hutvā niruḷhāti adhippāyo. Idāni sanimittaṃ nayaṃ vadati ‘‘apicā’’tiādinā. ‘‘Nissayopacāro’’ti ṭhānūpacāro, yathā sabbogāmo āgatoti. ‘‘Nissito pacāro’’ti ṭhānyūpacāro. Yathā dhajā āgacchantīti. ‘‘Yaṃ etasmiṃ antare’’ti ye etasmiṃ antare khandhadhātu āyatanā. Yaṃ rūpaṃ, yā vedanā, yāsaññā, ye saṅkhārā, yaṃviññāṇanti yojanā. ‘‘Suvisada’’nti yebhūyyādi nayehi anākulattāsuvisuddhaṃ. ‘‘Kiṃ vikkhepenā’’ti cittavikkhepena kiṃ payojananti attho.
20“以坏灭、彻底坏灭之义”,就是以破坏、彻底破坏之义。“Yatthā”指在那三地之法聚中。“Nivisatī”指恒常进入、靠近。“Tassā”指邪执。“Tesaṃ”指出世间法。“Yesaṃ”指世间法。“Lujjana”指以刹那坏灭而破坏。“Palujjana”指以形态崩坏、相续断绝而种种破坏。不过,涅槃在这里不被涉及,因为这是心摄论的范围,这是本意。而涅槃是不属于三地的状态,是单独的第四状态,称为地。这是其联结。
20. ‘‘Lujjanappalujjanaṭṭhenā’’ti bhijjanappabhijjanaṭṭhena. ‘‘Yatthā’’ti yasmiṃ tebhūmake dhammasamūhe. ‘‘Nivisatī’’ti niccaṃ visati, upagacchati. ‘‘Tassā’’ti micchāggāhassa. ‘‘Tesa’’nti lokuttara dhammānaṃ. ‘‘Yesa’’nti lokiya dhammānaṃ. ‘‘Lujjana’’nti khaṇikabhaṅgena bhijjanaṃ. ‘‘Palujjana’’nti saṇṭhānabhedena santaticchedena nānappakārato bhijjanaṃ. Nibbānaṃ pana idha na labbhati cittasaṅgahādhikārattāti adhippāyo. So ca apariyāpannabhāvo, visuṃ ekācatutthī avatthā bhūmināmāti yojanā.
21“卑下”是指因为不与信、念等美善之法相应,所以低劣。“一切卑下”是指因为与贪等恶法相应,所以比一切心都更低劣。“其目的”是指让上述诸心生起美想之乐的目的。“从最初”是指在开始时。“依心路心而说”是指依着“这是我的,我就是这个,这是我的自我”这样转起的有爱速行心路之心。既然如此,为什么要先说贪根心呢?因此说了“然而在诸不善中”等语。“以二种轮回根本”是指以被称为贪和痴的两种轮回根本。
21. ‘‘Hīna’’nti saddhāsatiādīhi sobhaṇadhammehi ayuttattāhīnaṃ. ‘‘Sabbahīna’’nti lobhādīhi pāpadhammehi yuttattā sabba cittehi hīnataraṃ. ‘‘Tadattho’’ti uparimānaṃ cittānaṃ sobhaṇasaññākaraṇasukhattho. ‘‘Ādito’’tiādimhi. ‘‘Vīthicittavasenāti etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, esome attāti evaṃ pavattassa bhavanikanti javanavīthicittassa vasena. Evañcasati, kiṃ kāraṇaṃ lobhamūlacittassapathamaṃ vacaneti āha ‘‘akusalesu panā’’tiādiṃ .‘‘Dvīhivaṭṭamūlehī’’ti lobhamohasaṅkhātehi dvīhi vaṭṭamūlehi.
22“心润泽”的意思是:因为与乐受相应,所以心不粗涩。若只说“具有喜悦的状态”,就可能把身体的乐受也包括进来,所以说“心理的……名为……”。“喜悦之名”就是名为喜悦者。“生起之因”是生起的近因。那么,“有”怎么会是生起之因呢?回答说:“成为……之后”。这里的“相”是处格。因此,“有”就是声音生起的因。现在为了说明“相”的特征,说“譬如……”。所谓“于此”,就是在那个作用中。“牙之因”就是牙的原因;“那受之因”就是那受的原因。这里或许有人问:已经说“于此相为处格”,而所谓“相”并不是作者,也不是能作,那它怎么能适用于能作的分析呢?应当理解为:因为依处和能作在意义上相近,所以是声音生起的因。或者说,“由此”和“从此”两者都表示因的意思。他们的意思是:近因就是能作的样子。善巧地造作,使那些没有由自然因缘完成的业依靠自身的力量得以完成,这就是“行”。“前行”就是前分的行。“作用”是令投入、令从事。“方便”是依此而达到名为果的目的。“唯以命令”就是唯以指派;“或以请求”就是或以祈请;“或以恐吓”就是或以示现怖畏。“把这样那样的方法告诉别人”:怎样告诉呢?回答说:“于不作……”。连起来说:“令投入于这样那样的业,所以这里名为行。”“因缘聚”就是自然因缘的集合。“以此”就是以此行。“共同的”是对善、不善、无记都共同。“以两种行”就是以作用或以方便。从“然而那与它俱在的”等开始,是为了用另一种方式说明前面已说过的意思,所以说“当那……时”等。“因此”等是表示已获得之德的话。“唯是因缘聚之名”是说,这只是因缘聚的特殊名称。如何知道“已生”义中有一个后缀呢?回答说:“在某个时候……”等。“在巴利中”就是在《法集论》的巴利中。“不加简择”就是不加思虑,这是意思。这一切都不合理。为什么?因为与巴利和义注不相符,而且义理和文辞都不清楚,这是其意趣。“那”就是心。“以此”就是以前面的作用。“如所说方式”就是以锐利状态等为装饰的特殊方式。“然而那”就是前面的作用。“因此”就是所以。“从那所生”就是由那前面的作用所生。“离弃之后”就是抛到不适当的一边。由此它被否定,这是关联。在偈颂中,“从心生起”就是在心中生起。特殊之行名为行,这是连起来说。就像“有光泽的、有同类的”等那样说。若说“有漏法、有境法”等,则更恰当。“巴利和义注所成立”就是从巴利和义注成立。另外,在《清净道论》等中说到“无行心、有行心”。在那里,后一种说法是恰当的。因为由方便所生起的有成百上千,所以说“这也只是显示方法而已”。“以舍的状态”就是以中立的状态。“由于”就是因为。变成变异状态。由此可知有极强的观见,这是连起来说。
22. ‘‘Siniddhacitta’’nti sātavedanāyuttattālūkhacittaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo. Sumanassabhāvoti vutte kāyikasukhavedanāyapi pasaṅgo siyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘mānasika…pe… nāma’’nti. ‘‘Sumanābhidhānassā’’ti sumananāmassa. ‘‘Pavattinimitta’’nti pavattiyā āsanna kāraṇaṃ. Kathaṃ pana bhāvo pavattinimittaṃ nāmahotīti āha ‘‘bhavanti…pe… katvā’’ti. Nimitte bhummaṃ. Tathāhi bhāvo nāma saddappavattinimittanti vuttaṃ. Idāni nimitta lakkhaṇaṃ dassento ‘‘yathāhī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti tasmiṃ payoge. ‘‘Danta nimitta’’nti dantakāraṇā. ‘‘Taṃ vedanā nimitta’’nti taṃ vedanākāraṇā. Ettha siyā, ‘‘etasminti nimitte bhumma’’nti vuttaṃ, nimittañcanāma akārakaṃ asādhanaṃ, taṃ kathaṃ sādhanaviggahe yujjatīti. Adhikaraṇa sādhanānurūpattā saddappavattinimittassāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etenāti ca etasmāti ca hetu atthe ubhayavacananti vadanti. Āsannahetu nāmasādhanarūpo bhavatīti tesaṃ adhippāyo. Suṭṭhu karoti, pakatipaccayena anipphannaṃ kammaṃ attano balena nipphādetīti saṅkhāro. ‘‘Pubbābhisaṅkhāro’’ti pubbabhāge abhisaṅkhāro. Payojeti niyojetīti payogo. Upeti phalasaṅkhāto attho etenāti upāyo. ‘‘Āṇattiyāvā’’ti pesanāyavā. ‘‘Ajjhesanena vā’’ti āyācanena vā. ‘‘Tajjetvā vā’’ti bhayaṃ dassetvā vā. ‘‘Taṃ taṃ upāyaṃ pare ācikkha’’nti. Kathaṃ ācikkhantīti āha ‘‘akaraṇe’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kamme payojetītikatvā idha saṅkhāro nāmā’’ti yojanā. ‘‘Paccaya gaṇo’’ti pakatipaccayagaṇo. ‘‘Tenā’’ti saṅkhārena. ‘‘Sādhāraṇo’’ti kusalākusalābyākatānaṃ sādhāraṇo. ‘‘Duvidhena saṅkhārenā’’ti payogena vā upāyena vā. ‘‘Yo pana tenasahito’’tiādinā pubbevuttamevatthaṃ pakārantarenapākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘sopana yadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Itī’’tiādi laddhaguṇa vacanaṃ. ‘‘Paccayagaṇassevanāma’’nti paccayagaṇasseva visesa nāmanti vuttaṃ hoti. Uppannatthe ikapaccayoti kathaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Pāḷiya’’nti dhammasaṅgaṇipāḷiyaṃ. ‘‘Asallakkhetvā’’ti acintetvā iccevattho. Sabbametaṃ nayujjatiyeva. Kasmā, pāḷiaṭṭhakathāhi asaṃsandanattā, atthayuttibyañjanayuttīnañca avisadattāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Ta’’nti cittaṃ. ‘‘Etenā’’ti pubbappayogena. ‘‘Yathāvuttanayenā’’ti tikkhabhāvasaṅkhātamaṇḍanavisesena. ‘‘So panā’’ti pubbappayogo pana. ‘‘Itī’’ti tasmā. ‘‘Taṃ nibbattito’’ti tena pubbappayogena nibbattito. ‘‘Virajjhitvā’’ti ayuttapakkhepatitvā. Etenapaṭikkhittā hotīti sambandho. Gāthāyaṃ. ‘‘Cittasambhavī’’ti cittasmiṃ sambhūto. Viseso saṅkhāro nāmāti yojanā. Salomako, sapakkhakotyādīsuviyāti vuttaṃ. Sāsavā dhammā, sārammaṇā dhammātyādīsuviyāti pana vutte yuttataraṃ. ‘‘Pāḷiaṭṭhakathā siddha’’nti pāḷiaṭṭhakathāto siddhaṃ. Apicayatthavisuddhimaggādīsu asaṅkhāraṃ cittaṃ, sasaṅkhāraṃ cittanti āgataṃ. Tattha ayaṃ pacchimanayo yutto. Upāyasamuṭṭhitassa anekasatasambhavato ‘‘idañca nayadassanamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Udāsinabhāvenā’’ti majjhattabhāvena. ‘‘Yato’’ti yasmā. Vikārapatto hoti. Tato adhimattapassanaṃ viññāyatīti yojanā.
23现在开始审查“俱行语”和“相应语”,从“此处亦……”等语句入手。为什么说“然而它们并非有差别的”?难道它们不是通过眼触、耳触等,通过欲思惟、瞋思惟等,通过于苦无知、于苦集无知等而成为有差别的吗?确实如此。然而,这些差别并不会使此心分裂。因此说它们并非有差别的。而且,它们并没有这种分别,这就是其中的关联。“于此心中”指在贪根心中。“于某处”指在任何一种心中。说到“或唯”时,指的是善法中出现的那些“或唯”。“以其他”指以瞋根和痴根。难道它们在这里也应当被取吗?这是关联句。“否”,即不应取。为什么?回答说“因为对于它们……”等。它们在这里也应当不被取。但并非不被取。为什么?因为受本身是有差别的,而且见行之差别也存在,这是其意趣所在。
23. Idāni sahagatavacana sampayuttavacanāni vicārento ‘‘etthacā’’tiādimārabhi. ‘‘Na pana te bhedavantā hontī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ. Na nu tepicakkhu samphasso, sotasamphasso, tiādinā ca, kāmavitakko, byāpādavitakko, tiādinā ca, dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇa, ntiādināca bhedavantā hontīti. Saccaṃ. Te pana bhedā imaṃ cittaṃ bhinnaṃ na karonti. Tasmā te bhedavantāna hontīti vuttā. Na ca tesaṃ ayaṃ vikappo atthīti sambandho. ‘‘Imasmiṃ citte’’ti lobhamūlacitte. ‘‘Katthacī’’ti kismiñci citte. Yevāpanāti vutte sudhammesu āgatāniyevāpanakāni. ‘‘Aññehī’’ti dosamūlamohamūlehi. Nanutānipi idha gahetabbānīti sambandho. ‘‘Nā’’ti na gahetabbāni. Kasmāti āha ‘‘tesuhī’’tiādiṃ . Tepi idha nagahetabbā siyuṃ. Na pana na gahetabbā. Kasmā, vedanāya ca sayaṃ bhedavantattā, diṭṭhisaṅkhārānañca vikappasabbhāvāti adhippāyo.
24“喜的原因”是指喜生起的原因。说明了喜生起的原因时,与它俱行的心生起的原因也就成立了,因此只说了喜的原因,应当这样理解。所以说到“以喜为结生者”等等。应当用“与低劣的……乃至……所缘结合,与它相应的心也生起……”等这样的话来说明。在“脱离灾祸”中也是这样。在舍的原因中,“脱离灾祸”这句话是为了排除忧生起的可能而说的。“意乐”是指所依止的家。以见为意乐的人,就叫“见意乐者”。这种状态就是“见意乐性”。“非如理浮起”是指以不正确的方式转向、作意。“以思惟随逐之力”是指以对深奥诸法思惟随逐的力量,以审察增长的力量。“唯见为因”是指只见到类似因的相貌。因此说“以核心、以真实浮起”。“以与此相反者”是指与上述相反的情况。没有见意乐性、远离见有亏损的人、听闻正法、多作如理思惟,以及如理浮起,应当说是脱离见的原因。
24. ‘‘Somanassassakāraṇa’’nti somanassuppattiyā kāraṇaṃ. Somanassuppattiyā kāraṇe vutte taṃ sahagata cittuppattiyāpikāraṇaṃ siddhaṃ hotīti katvā tameva vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘somanassappaṭisandhikohī’’tiādiṃ. Hīnena vā…pe… ārammaṇena samāyogo, tena samāyuttassāpi cittaṃ uppajjamānantiādinā vattabbaṃ. Tathā byasanamuttiyaṃpi. Upekkhākāraṇe ‘‘byasanamuttī’’ti idaṃ domanassappasaṅgaparihāravacanaṃ. Ajjhāsayovuccati ajjhāvuttaṃ gehaṃ. Diṭṭhisaṅkhāto ajjhāsayoyassāti diṭṭhajjhāsayo. Tassa bhāvo diṭṭhajjhāsayatā. ‘‘Ayoniso ummujjana’’nti anupāyato ābhujanaṃ, manasikaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Cintā pasutavasenā’’ti gambhīresu dhammesu cintāpasavanavasena, vīmaṃsā vaḍḍhanavasena. ‘‘Diṭṭhakāraṇamevā’’ti diṭṭhaṃ kāraṇappaṭirūpakameva. Tenāha ‘‘sāratosaccato ummujjana’’nti. ‘‘Tabbiparītenā’’ti tato viparītena. Adiṭṭhajjhāsayatā, diṭṭhivipannapuggalaparivajjanatā, saddhammasavanatā, sammāvitakkabahulatā, yoniso ummujjanañca diṭṭhivippayogakāraṇanti vattabbaṃ.
这些心生起的种种方式,应当从《清净道论》中获取,也就是要按照《清净道论》的蕴分别来获取。其含义在那里已经说过了。当一个人以“欲乐中实无过患”等这样的方式,把邪见放在前面,欢欢喜喜、心满意足地享受欲乐,或者把所见到的吉兆等当作真实,这时心是自性锐利而没有受到他人鼓励的,此时生起第一种不善心。当心是迟钝而受到鼓励的,那时生起第二种。当不把邪见放在前面,只是欢欢喜喜、心满意足地行淫欲,或者贪求他人的成就,或者偷取他人的财物,这时心是自性锐利而没有受到鼓励的,那时生起第三种。当心是迟钝而受到鼓励的,那时生起第四种。然而,当因为欲乐得不到,或者因为其他能生喜的因不存在,在这四种情况中都没有喜时,那时就会生起其余四种与舍俱行的心。
‘‘Imesaṃ pana cittānaṃ uppattividhānaṃ visuddhimaggegahetabba’’nti visuddhi maggekhandha niddesato gahetabbaṃ. Vuttañhitattha. Yadā hinatthikāmesu ādīnavotiādinānayena micchādiṭṭhiṃ purekkhitvā haṭṭhatuṭṭho kāmevā paribhuñjati, diṭṭhamaṅgalādīni vā sāratopacceti sabhāva tikkhena anussāhitenacittena. Tadā pathamaṃ akusala cittaṃ uppajjati. Yadā mandena samussāhitena cittena, tadādutīyaṃ. Yadā micchā diṭṭhiṃ apurekkhitvā kevalaṃ haṭṭhatuṭṭho methunaṃ vā sevati, para sampattiṃ vā abhijjhāyati, parabhaṇḍaṃ vā harati sabhāvatikkheneva anussāhitena cittena. Tadā tatīyaṃ. Yadā mandena samussāhitenacittena, tadā catutthaṃ. Yadā pana kāmānaṃ vā asampattiṃ āgamma aññesaṃ vā somanassahetūnaṃ abhāvena catūsupi vikappesu somanassarahitāhonti , tadāsesāni cattāri upekkhāsahagatāni uppajjantīti.
25在嗔根心里。“Virūpa”(畸形/恶劣)是指被嗔害所染污的、凶恶的。如果只说成“忧的状态”,那就可能把身体上的苦受也牵扯进来,所以接着说“意所生……乃至……名”。Paṭihaññati 是打击、逼迫的意思。“Santatte”是被烧热、被灼烧的意思。
25. Dosamūlacitte. ‘‘Virūpa’’nti duṭṭhaṃ, luddaṃ. Dummanassa bhāvoti vutte kāyikadukkhavedanāyapi pasaṅgo siyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘mānasika…pe… nāma’’nti. Paṭihaññati bādhati. ‘‘Santatte’’ti santāpite.
26“制造分裂”是指制造彼此间的差别。“并非制造分裂”是说这些心并非制造彼此间的差别。取“忧”是为了排除关联。所谓关联,就是以种种方式黏着、执取。是怎样的关联呢?他因此说了“然而当……”等。“宣称满足”是说他们宣称“这些之死便是满足”。这样排除了俱生的关联之后,为了排除相应的关联,又说了“取嗔亦……”等。杀畜生并不算是不善,其意趣是:从劫初起,为了供人们随意受用,这些畜生是由世间主以不动之愿所化作的。“无疑虑”是指没有疑心。“或其他人”是指或别的什么人。疑就是犹豫。凡生起犹豫的人,就是犹豫所生者。前心是与贪俱行的,这八种心也是与贪俱行的心——依此略结,似乎并未成立。依略结成立了嗔相应,伴忧的状态也就依此成立了,因此说“取它们”。“它们”是指忧与嗔。在这个心中,嫉、悭、恶作以及掉举、睡眠,既是不定相应的,也是或有的。因此说了“于前心……”等。忧在这个心中有,在其他心中没有,所以是不共的法。也叫作不共于其他的法。“如彼”是指那个示范、那个例证,意思是怎样做的。“标示”是指使人知道。遮阳的伞盖就是遮阳伞。白伞。得伞者,即获得了遮阳伞的人。王子。说“他获得了遮阳伞”时,就可以知道他已经获得了全部的王家财富。因此应当看出,这是标示性的说法。“二者的”是指忧和嗔这两者。前面说了“与忧俱行”,而在总结时说了“与嗔相应的心”,因此说了“此……成立”。
26. ‘‘Bhedakaro’’ti aññamaññavisesakaro. ‘‘Bhedakarāna hontī’’ti imassa cittassa aññamaññavisesakarāna honti. Domanassaggahaṇaṃ pasaṅganivattanatthaṃ gahitanti yojanā. Pasaṅgoti canānappakārato sajjanaṃ lagganaṃ. Kathaṃ pasaṅgoti āha ‘‘yadāhī’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Tuṭṭhiṃ pavedentī’’ti tuṭṭhāmayaṃ imesaṃ maraṇenātiādi cikkhanti. Evaṃ sahagatappasaṅgaṃ nivattetvā sampayuttappasaṅgaṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘paṭighaggahaṇaṃpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tiracchānagatapāṇavadhe apuññaṃ nāma natthi. Ādikappato paṭṭhāya manussānaṃ yathākāma paribhogatthāya lokissariyenathāvaraṭṭhāyinā nimmitattāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Vissaṭṭhā’’ti anāsaṅkā. ‘‘Aññevā’’ti aññe vā jane. Vimati eva vematikaṃ. Vematikaṃ jātaṃ yesaṃ te vematikajātā. Purimacittassalobhasahagatabhāvo imāniaṭṭhapi lobhasahagatacittānināmāti iminā cūḷanigamane neva siddhoviyāti yojanā. Cūḷanigamanena paṭighasampayutta bhāvesiddhe domanassasahagatabhāvopi tenasiddho yevāti katvā ‘‘tesaṃ gahaṇaṃ’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tesa’’nti donassapaṭighānaṃ. Imasmiṃ citte issāmacchariyakukkuccānicathinamiddhāni ca aniyatayogīni ca honti yevāpanakāni ca. Tenāha ‘‘purimacitte’’tiādiṃ. Domanassaṃ imasmiṃ citte atthi, aññacittesu natthi, tasmā asādhāraṇa dhammo nāma. Anaññasādhāraṇa dhammotipi vuccati. ‘‘Yathātaṃ’’ti taṃ nidassanaṃ tadudāharaṇaṃ yathā katamanti attho. ‘‘Upalakkhetī’’ti saññāpeti. Ātapaṃtāyatirakkhatīti ātapattaṃ. Setacchattaṃ. Laddhaṃ ātapattaṃ yenāti laddhātapatto. Rājakumāro. So ātapattaṃ laddhoti vutte sabbaṃ rājasampattiṃ laddhoti viññāyati. Tasmā idaṃ upalakkhaṇa vacanaṃ jātanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Ubhinna’’nti dvinnaṃ domanassa paṭighānaṃ. Pubbe domanassasahagatanti vatvā nigamane paṭighasampayuttacittānīti vuttattā ‘‘imassa…pe… siddhito’’ti vuttaṃ.
27“不可爱的世间法”是指得不到利益、恶名、责难、以及痛苦这四种不可爱的世间法。“这在哪里能得到呢”的意思是:即使我心里祈愿“愿我不要遇到得不到利益等事”,这种祈愿又哪里能在此世间一切时都得到满足呢?这里的意思是,这种祈愿的满足在此世间是不可能一切时都得到的。“能得到”这个词,是用来显明业义的原形词。这四种法生起的方式,在《清净道论》里只是简略地说过;至于它们,应当从杀生等业中猛烈或缓慢现起的时候去了知。
27. ‘‘Aniṭṭhalokadhammehī’’ti alābho ca, ayasoca, nindāca, dukkhañcāti catūhi aniṭṭhalokadhammehi. ‘‘Taṃ kutettha labbhā’’ti ahaṃ alābhādīhi māsamāgacchīti patthentassapi kutomeetthaloketaṃ patthanā pūraṇaṃ sabbakālaṃ labbhāti attho. ‘‘Labbhā’’ti ca kammatthadīpakaṃ pāṭipadikapadaṃ. Imesaṃ uppattividhānaṃ visuddhimagge saṅkhepatova vuttaṃ tassa pāṇāti pātādīsu tikkhamandappavattikāle pavattiveditabbāti.
28在痴根心里。“没有其他根”是指缺少别的根。Saṃsappati 是徘徊的意思,即“是这样吗?还是别样?”——就这样以两种方式激动、动摇,意思是内心动摇。Vikkhipati 是散乱。所谓“为了确定”,这个(心)就叫作与疑相应,因此说是为了确定。因为这种心不像与嗔相应的心那样,靠结论就能成立。“在此处得到机会”是指正因为没有其他根,才在此处得到了机会。它的自性是本来如此的,因此说“没有”,这是句义连接。“不退缩”是指不从后面退转。“不沉没”是指不从下方坠落。通过这两者,说的是没有中断。“因为极度迷惑”是指由于没有其他根,以痴而极度迷惑。“因为极度动摇”是指由于徘徊、散乱、疑、掉举而极度动摇。“于一切处”是指在一切所缘上。在义注中,只按行蕴的分别说了无明的两种状态。如何说的呢?无明从无行与邪行两方面分为两种,同样也从有行和无行两方面来说。“有三种状态”是指在这一点上,与离诸行的无明一起,只有三种状态。应当知道,这两种心的生起方式,在《清净道论》中依概要所说,是在其不确定和散乱的时刻发生的。
28. Mohamūlacitte. ‘‘Mūlantaravirahenā’’ti aññamūlavirahena. Saṃsappatīti saṃsappamānā. Evaṃ nu kho, aññathānu khoti evaṃ dvidhā erayati kampatīti attho. Vikkhipatīti vikkhipamānaṃ. ‘‘Niyamanattha’’nti idaṃ vicikicchāsampayuttaṃ nāmāti niyamanatthaṃ. Idañhi paṭighasampayuttaṃ viya nigamanena siddhaṃ na hoti. ‘‘Idha laddhokāsaṃ hutvā’’ti mūlantara virahattā eva idhaladdhokāsaṃ hutvā. Pakati sabhāvabhūtaṃ, iti tasmā natthīti yojanā. ‘‘Anosakkamāna’’nti pacchato anivattamānaṃ. ‘‘Asaṃsīdamāna’’nti heṭṭhato apatamānaṃ. Ubhayena abbocchinnanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Atisammuḷhatāyā’’ti mūlantara virahena mohena atisammuḷhatāya. ‘‘Aticañcalatāyā’’ti saṃsappamānavikkhipamānehivicikicchuddhaccehi aticañcalatāya. ‘‘Sabbatthapī’’ti sabbesupi ārammaṇesu. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ saṅkhāra bhedena avijjāya duvidhabhāvova vutto. Kathaṃ vutto. Avijjā appaṭipatti micchā paṭipattito duvidhā tathā sasaṅkhā rāsaṅkhāratoti vutto. ‘‘Tividhabhāvovā’’ti imasmiṃ cittesaṅkhāravimuttāya avijjāya saddhiṃ tividhabhāvova. Imesaṃ dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ uppattividhānaṃ visuddhimaggesaṅkhepatovavuttaṃ tassaasanniṭṭhānavikkhepakālepavatti veditabbāti.
29“Sabbathāpi”这个词,既可以是一组小品词的组合,也可以是彼此的同义词,或者是一个单独的小品词,总之就是“以一切方式”的意思。在“不善”这个词里,前缀“a”表示相反的意思,就像“amitto”(非友)、“asuro”(非天)那样。为了说明这一点,所以说了“akusalāni”等。“相违的状态”是指与无明等不善法相违的状态。它们不配被修习,所以叫“不配修习”。那为什么说不配被修习呢?所以说了“再三”等。“即使进入决定道的人”,是指因为五无间业的业性,或者因为决定性的邪见,而进入决定道的人。他们堕入恶趣,也就是属于恶趣的人。他们是造业者。他们的状态。依此。“被系缚于轮回之流中”,就是被系缚在生死轮回的流中。“获得更坚固”,是指依靠定力而达到更坚固的状态。现在为了用另一种方式说明这个意思,所以说了“再者”等。“siyuṃ”这个词并不是由词根和词缀构成的派生词。为什么?因为这里没有假设的可能。它是一个小品词。为什么?因为它有多种含义的可能。而在这里,它和“bhavanti”(成为)同义。因此说“此处应看作小品词”。
29. ‘‘Sabbathāpī’’ti nipātasamudāyo vā hotu aññamaññavevacano vā, visuṃ nipātovāti evaṃ sabbappakāratopi. Akusalapade akāro viruddhattho. Yathā amitto, asuro, tidassetuṃ ‘‘akusalānī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Paṭiviruddhabhāvo’’ti mohādīhi akusalehi viruddhabhāvo. Bhāvanaṃnārahantīti ‘‘abhāvanārahā’’. Kathaṃ pana bhāvanaṃnārahantīti āha ‘‘punappuna’’ntiādiṃ. ‘‘Niyāmaṃ okkamantāpī’’ti pañcānantariya kammabhāvena niyatamicchādiṭṭhibhāvena ca niyāmaṃ okkamantāpi. Apāyaṃ bhajantīti apāyabhāgino. Kammakārakā. Tesaṃ bhāvo. Tāya. ‘‘Vaṭṭasotaniyate’’ti saṃsāravaṭṭa sotasmiṃ niyate. ‘‘Thiratarapattā’’ti samādhivasena thiratarabhāvaṃ pattā. Idāni tamevatthaṃ pakārantarena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Siyu’’nti padaṃ dhātupaccayehi siddhaṃ nipphannapadaṃ nāma nahoti. Kasmā, idhaparikappatthassa asambhavato. Nipātapadaṃ hoti. Kasmā, anekatthatā sambhavato. Idha pana bhavanti saddena samānattho. Tenāha ‘‘nipātapadaṃ idha daṭṭhabba’’nti.
30在无因心里。“最下劣”,就是比一切心都下劣。再者,“最下劣”,就是比一切无因心都下劣。“它”指不善果报。
30. Ahetukacitte. ‘‘Sabbanihīna’’nti sabbacittehi hīnaṃ. Puna ‘‘sabbanihīna’’nti sabbāhetukehi hīnaṃ. ‘‘Ta’’nti akusala vipākaṃ.
31在经文里,“kaṭṭha”指干木头,“sakalika”指被砍断并劈开的木片,“thusa”指谷壳,“saṅkāra”指垃圾。“依于眼和色而生起的识,就称为眼识”,应当这样配合理解。其中,“色”指色的所缘。在“声”等地方,也是同样的道理。这里,诸识都依于同一个依处,所以依处与门用单数;但即使一个识也能取多个所缘,所以所缘用复数。“dukkhayati”就是造成痛苦,这是一个名词性的词根词。正如声明家所说“attānaṃ sukheti vīṇeti”。但在《词根诵》中则说“sukhadukkhatakkiriyāyaṃ”。所谓“takkiriyā”,就是乐的作用、苦的作用,其义为乐受的作用与苦受的作用。所说的就是“sātakiriyā assātakiriyā”。把“ca”一词理解为“okāsa”之义,因此说“dukkaraṃ okāsadānaṃ”。
31. Suttapāḷiyaṃ, ‘‘kaṭṭha’’nti sukkhadāruṃ. ‘‘Sakalika’’nti chinditaphālitaṃ kaṭṭhakkhaṇḍakaṃ. ‘‘Thusa’’nti vīhisuṅkaṃ. ‘‘Saṅkāra’’nti kacavaraṃ. Cakkhuñcarūpe ca paṭicca yaṃviññāṇaṃ uppajjati. Taṃ cakkhuviññāṇantveva vuccatītiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Tattha ‘‘rūpe’’ti rūpārammaṇāna . ‘‘Sadde’’tiādīsupi esanayo. Ettha ca viññāṇāni ekavatthu nissitāni honti. Tasmā vatthu dvāresu ekavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇāni pana ekaviññāṇenāpi bahūni gahitāni. Tasmā ārammaṇesu bahuvacanaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhayatī’’ti dukkhaṃ karoti. Nāmadhātu padañhetaṃ. Yathā attānaṃ sukheti vīṇetīti saddavidū. Dhātupāṭhesu pana sukhadukkhatakkiriyāyaṃti vuttaṃ. Takkiriyāti ca sukhakiriyā dukkha kiriyāti attho. Sātakiriyā assātakiriyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ca saddo okāsatthoti katvā ‘‘dukkaraṃ okāsadāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
32“眼不坏”,就是眼净色没有损坏。因为它一旦坏了,就像盲人的眼睛一样,色境不会现前。“耳不坏”等等,也是同样的道理。“获得光明依止”,是说眼要有光明才能起作用,没有光明就不能,色也是这样。所以光明是它们进入所缘与能缘关系的依止。获得这种光明依止。虚空依止等也是同样的道理。这些支分的合理性,将在后面讲色摄时说明。“在注释书中”,指的是《殊胜义论》。在那里,为了不承认“即使所缘现前,如果没有光明依止,眼识也不生起”这种说法,所以说了“没有那光明”等话。“以显示不存在为主”,就是以显示不存在为重点。
32. ‘‘Cakkhussa asambhinnatā’’ti cakkhupasādarūpassa abhinnatā. Tasmiñhi bhinnesati andhassa cakkhussa rūpāninupaṭṭhahantīti. ‘‘Sotassaasambhinnatā’’tiādīsupi esanayo. ‘‘Ālokasannissayappaṭilābho’’ti cakkhu ca ālokesati kiccakārī hoti. Asati nahoti. Tathā rūpañca. Tasmā āloko tesaṃ visayavisayībhāvūpagamane sannissayo hoti. Tassa ālokasannissayassa paṭilābho. Esanayo ākāsasannissayādīsu. Imesaṃ aṅgānaṃ yutti dīpanā uparirūpasaṅgahe āgamissati. ‘‘Aṭṭhakathāya’’nti aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ. Tattha ‘‘tasmiṃ pana āpātaṃ āgacchantepi ālokasannissaye asati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nuppajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ asambhāvento ‘‘taṃ vinā ālokenā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Abhāvadassana para’’nti abhāvadassanappadhānaṃ.
3333. 在解释“果报”这个词的含义时。“成熟”就是果报。而“成熟”是说达到了成熟的状态。意思是说,先前所造的业如今生起了。现在为了把那个含义说明白,就说了“此义亦”等话。注释书里也提到了“具足积累”。但这里把思收摄于具足之中,所以说“四种具足”。“具足”就是完备。“在造作种种业的时候”,是指在杀生等、远离杀生等种种恶行或善业正在造作、正在累积的时候。这是累积之时之义。“完全达到不存在而灭去”,就像无记法灭去时完全达到不存在而灭去。同样地,它们并非如此灭去,这是意趣。“一切行相圆满”,是指杀生者的身语意诸多变异与业相应而显现。这个道理也适用于不与取等。“以这样的种种行相变异而圆满”。“藏置或”是指安放之后。“为了什么目的”是指为了何种行为差别的原因。
33. Vipākavacanatthe. Vipaccatīti vipākaṃ. Vipaccatīti ca vipakkabhāvaṃ āpajjati. Pubbe katakammaṃ idāni nibbattiṃ pāpuṇātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idāni tadatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto ‘‘ayañca attho’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āyūhana samaṅgitāpi āgatā. Idha panasā cetanā samaṅgitāya saṅgahitāti katvā ‘‘catasso samaṅgithā’’ti vuttaṃ. Samaṅgitāti ca sampannatā. ‘‘Taṃ taṃ kammāyūhana kāle’’ti pāṇāti pātādikassa tabbiramaṇādikassa ca tassa tassa duccaritasucaritakammassa āyūhanakāle. Samuccinanakāleti attho. ‘‘Sabbaso abhāvaṃ patvāna nirujjhatī’’ti yathā abyākata dhammānirujjhamānā sabbaso abhāvaṃ patvā nirujjhanti. Tathā nanirujjhantīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Sabbākāra paripūra’’nti pāṇātipātaṃ karontassa kammānu rūpābahūkāya vacīmano vikārā sandissanti. Esanayo adinnādānādīsu. Evarūpehi sabbehi ākāra vikārehi paripūraṃ. ‘‘Nidahitvā vā’’ti saṇṭhapetvā eva. ‘‘Yaṃsandhāyā’’ti yaṃkiriyāvisesanidhānaṃ sandhāya.
在偈颂中。“sajju”是指就在那一天。“khīraṃ vamuccati”是说,就像乳汁在那一天被释放出来,舍弃了常态,发生了变化。而所造的恶业却不是这样,这是句子的连接方式。那它又是怎样的呢?回答说:“燃烧时跟随愚人。”“bhasmāchannova pāvako”就像被灰覆盖的火。“而那个”,是表示作用的差别。“它不单独算作一个胜义法”,意思是它不能以单独相应法的身份被算作一个。因为它是由业缘所生的法,所以不能说它不是胜义法,因此说“如随眠界”。“那个”是表示作用的差别。“它”指业,或者业相,或者趣相。“那时得到机会”,是为了成熟而得到机会,得到机会后就现前,这是要表达的意思。“在那里”,是指在那些具足当中。“如是”,是对已得功德的表述。“如此而作”等,又是对已得功德的表述。“在圣典中”,是指在《法集论》圣典中。“从业相续”,说的就是无色相续。“然而那些”,是指论师们。“他们的”,是指论师们的。产生,这是连接关系。或者应该连接为“在他们的论说中”。他们显示譬喻,这是连接。“在那里”,是指在那个说法中。并非得不到,这是连接。“那时”,是指在成熟的时候。“nāḷa”是指花果的梗。
Gāthāyaṃ. ‘‘Sajjū’’ti imasmiṃ divase. ‘‘Khīraṃ vamuccatī’’ti yathā khīraṃ nāma imasmiṃ divase muccati. Pakatiṃ jahati. Vipariṇāmaṃ gacchati. Na tathā pāpaṃ kataṃ kammanti yojanā. Kathaṃ pana hotīti āha ‘‘dahantaṃ bālamanvetī’’ti. ‘‘Bhasmāchannovapāvako’’ti chārikā channoviya aggi. ‘‘So panā’’ti kiriyā viseso pana. ‘‘Visuṃ eko paramattha dhammotipi saṅkhyaṃ na gacchatī’’ti visuṃ sampayutta dhamma bhāvena saṅkhyaṃ na gacchatīti adhippāyo. So hi kammapaccayadhammattā paramattha dhammo na hotīti na vattabbo. Tenāha ‘‘anusayadhātuyo viyā’’ti. ‘‘So’’ti kiriyāviseso. ‘‘Ta’’nti kammaṃ vā, kammanimittaṃ vā, gatinimittaṃ vā. ‘‘Tadā okāsaṃ labhatī’’ti vipaccanatthāya okāsaṃ labhati. Okāsaṃ labhitvā paccupaṭṭhātīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti tāsu ca tūsusamaṅgitāsu. ‘‘Itī’’ti laddhaguṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Evañca katvā’’tiādi puna laddhaguṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Pāḷiya’’nti dhammasaṅgaṇi pāḷiyaṃ. ‘‘Kammasantānato’’ti arūpasantānaṃ eva vuccati. ‘‘Ye panā’’ti ganthakārā pana. ‘‘Tesa’’nti ganthakārānaṃ. Āpajjatīti sambandho. Tesaṃ vādeti vā yojetabbaṃ. Yañcaupamaṃ dassentīti yojanā. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti tasmiṃ vacane. Na ca na labhantīti yojanā. ‘‘Tadā’’ti tasmiṃ pariṇatakāle. ‘‘Nāḷa’’nti pupphaphalānaṃ daṇḍakaṃ.
34“Sambhavo”(相生)是附带生起的理由。Abhicāra(专行)是指特别的行、转起,也就是特殊的作用。Na abhicāra(非专行)就是byabhicāra(普遍行),是普通的作用。这是说,从另一个角度来说有共通性。所谓“从另一个角度来说有共通性”,意思是:从另一个角度以种种方式,只是粘着、只是附着,因此就是普遍行的,也就是附带生起的——这就是它的含义。从“Etthacāti”等开始,说明相生和普遍行都不存在。与不善因俱有,有因性之相生是不存在的,这是句子的连接。“Tesaṃ”指不善果报。“Abyabhicāroyeva”就是确实没有普遍行。
34. ‘‘Sambhavo’’ti pasaṅgakāraṇaṃ. Abhivisesena caraṇaṃ pavattanaṃ abhicāro. Visesa vutti. Na abhicāro byabhicāro. Sāmañña vutti. Pakkhantarena sādhāraṇatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pakkhantarena sādhāraṇatā nāmapakkhantarassa nānappakārato sajjanameva lagganamevāti vuttaṃ byabhicārassāti pasaṅgassa iccevatthoti. Etthacātiādinā sambhavabyabhicārānaṃ abhāvameva vadati. Akusalahetūhi ca sahetukatā sambhavo natthīti sambandho. ‘‘Tesa’’nti akusalavipākānaṃ. ‘‘Abyabhicāroyevā’’ti byabhicārarahitoyeva.
35“在五门生起”这句话,是就缘于五门的变化而生起这一点来说的。因此说了“那(tañhi)”等话。同样的道理也适用于意门转向。
35. ‘‘Pañcadvāre uppanna’’nti pañcadvāravikāraṃ paṭicca uppannattā vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tañhī’’tiādiṃ. Esanayo manodvārāvajjanepi.
如果这个意义确实存在,那么在这种情况下,这个意义就产生了——这就是句子的连接关系。“Tesaṃ”指的是诸路心。因为“uppāda”这个词是确定性的阳性词,所以说“在复注中……有所说明”。“依所说的方法”就是依“没有相应因”所说的方法。所谓异熟的作用,就是异熟心的作用;令异熟生起的作用,就是善心与不善心的作用。“那些只是唯作性质的”指的是转向唯作、生笑唯作等性质的心。结生心、有分心、死心,仅仅是以业力投生而落入相续中的状态,所以是作用虚弱的心。五识则因为依于不坚实、无力的净色所依而生起,所以是所依虚弱的心。领受等心则因为仅仅是跟随五识而生起,所以是作用处虚弱的心。因此,这一切心都没有自己的努力,仅仅以异熟的方式转起。“从异熟相续”是说,五门转向和意门转向从有分异熟相续得到缘;确定心从五识等异熟相续得到缘。“其他诸心”指生笑心、大唯作心等。“在无随眠的相续中”指在无随眠、漏尽者的相续中。“确实没有努力”:就像树木有风媒花,那些花因为没有能生果的滋润,所以不结果实;同样,那些心因为没有能生异熟的渴爱滋润,所以确实没有努力和造作。
Yadi hi ayamatthosiyā, evañcasati, ayamattho āpajjatīti sambandho. ‘‘Tesa’’nti vīthicittānaṃ. Uppādasaddoniyatapulliṅgoti katvā ‘‘ṭīkāsu pana…pe… niddiṭṭhaṃ’’ siyāti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vuttanayenā’’ti sampayuttahetuvirahatoti vuttanayena. Vipaccana kiccaṃ nāma vipākānaṃ kiccaṃ. Vipākuppādanakiccaṃ nāma kusalākusalānaṃ kiccaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ taṃ kiriyāmattabhūtānī’’ti āvajjana kiriyā hasanakiriyāmattabhūtāni. Paṭisandhibhavaṅgacuticittāni nāma kevalaṃ kammavegukkhittabhāvenasantānepatitamattattā dubbala kiccāni honti. Pañca viññāṇāni ca asārānaṃ abalānaṃ pasādavatthūnaṃ nissāya uppannattā dubbalavatthukāni honti. Sampaṭicchanādīni ca pañcaviññāṇānubandha mattattā dubbala kiccaṭṭhānāni honti. Tasmā tāni sabbāni attano ussāhenavinā kevalaṃ vipaccanamattena pavattanti. ‘‘Vipākasantānato’’ti pañcadvārāvajjanañca manodvārāvajjanañca bhavaṅgavipākasantānato laddhapaccayaṃ hoti. Voṭṭhabbanaṃ pañcaviññāṇādi vipākasantānato laddhapaccayaṃ. ‘‘Itarāni panā’’ti hasituppādacitta mahākiriyacittādīni. ‘‘Niranusayasantāne’’ti anusayarahite khīṇāsavasantāne. ‘‘Ussāharahitāni evā’’ti yathā rukkhānaṃ vātapupphāni nāma atthi. Tāni phaluppādakasineharahitattā phalāni na uppādenti. Tathā tāni ca vipākuppādakataṇhāsineharahitattā ussāhabyāpāra rahitāni eva.
36在对感受的审察中,“如棉团”的意思是:就像两个棉团互相摩擦那样,所造色的互相摩擦也是微弱的——这是这里的连接方式。“作为它们所缘的”指三大种。“在身依止的大种中”指在身依止的大种中。“以它们”指以五识。“以之前的心”指以领受心。“它”指不善果报的推度心。没有接触,它就不生起。为什么没有接触就不生起?回答说“因为是纯粹不善的”等等。“因为在无记心中不可能”指在无记心中不可能相应。而且,这是依于业力而如此生起的,如同先前的异熟相续依业力而生起那样;若不那样生起,这就是意旨。“以某种心”指以某种心。“以不同心相续的转向力”指以与先前异熟心相续不同的善等速行心相续,随后转向的力量。因此,在圣典中,这二心被表述为转向、随转向、作意、等引。“在一切处”指在可意所缘和不可意所缘中。“依自己之后生起的心”意思是,不应依自己之后生起的心来说——这是意旨。“只能依自己的缘来说”意思是,在自己的缘强有力时,它就强;在缘弱时,它就弱——这是可以说的。“不同心相续”指确定唯作心的相续。
36. Vedanāvicāraṇāyaṃ. ‘‘Picupiṇḍakānaṃ viyā’’ti dvinnaṃ kappāsapicupiṇḍakānaṃ aññamaññasaṅghaṭṭanaṃ viya upādārūpānañca aññamaññasaṅghaṭṭanaṃ dubbalamevāti yojanā. ‘‘Tesaṃ ārammaṇabhūtāna’’nti tiṇṇaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ. ‘‘Kāyanissayabhūtesū’’ti kāyanissayamahābhūtesu .‘‘Tehī’’ti pañcaviññāṇehi. ‘‘Purimacittenā’’ti sampaṭicchanacittato. ‘‘Ta’’nti akusalavipākasantīraṇaṃ. Paṭighena vinā nappavattati. Kasmā nappavattatīti āha ‘‘ekantākusalabhūtenā’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Abyākatesu asambhavato’’ti abyākata cittesu yujjituṃ asambhavato. Kammānubhāvato ca muñcitvā yathāpurimaṃ vipākasantānaṃ kammānubhāvena pavattaṃ hoti. Tathā appavattitvāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Kenacī’’ti kenaci cittena. ‘‘Visadisacittasantāna parāvaṭṭanavasenā’’ti purimenavipāka citta santānena visadisaṃ kusalādi javana cittasantānaṃ parato āvaṭṭā pana vasena. Tathāhidaṃ cittadvayaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āvaṭṭanā, anvāvaṭṭanā, ābhogo, samannāhāroti niddiṭṭhaṃ. ‘‘Sabbatthāpī’’ti iṭṭhārammaṇepi aniṭṭhārammaṇepi. ‘‘Attano pacchā pavattassa cittassa vasenā’’ti attano pacchā pavattaṃ cittaṃ paṭicca na vattabboti adhippāyo. ‘‘Attano paccayehi eva so sakkā vattu’’nti attano paccayesu balavantesu sati, balavā hoti. Dubbalesu sati, dubbalo hotīti sakkāvattunti adhippāyo. ‘‘Visadisa cittasantāna’’nti voṭṭhabbanakiriyacittasantānaṃ.
3737. 在对行的审察中,“在异熟分别里”是指在《殊胜义论》中关于异熟分别的讨论。“以两种业”是指以有行业的业和无行业的业。“由长老”是指由大达多长老所说。“那两者的状态不存在”是指有行状态和无行状态都不存在。“因为它们也是作用不明显的”:在这里,两种转向心因为是速行的前导,所以作用不明显。但生笑心具有速行的作用,怎么会是作用不明显呢?因为它只是随一切知智等而起的随从,所以称为作用不明显。“应如八大异熟心那样说”的意思是:八大异熟心的有行、无行状态,是依据前生临终时所缘的呈现有没有努力来安立的,这里也应同样理解——这就是其意趣。
37. Saṅkhāra vicāraṇāyaṃ ‘‘vipākuddhāre’’ti aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ vipākuddhāra kathāyaṃ. ‘‘Ubhayakammenapī’’ti sasaṅkhārika kammenapi, asaṅkhārika kammenapi. ‘‘Therenā’’ti mahādattattherena. ‘‘Tadubhayabhāvābhāvo’’ti sasaṅkhārika asaṅkhārikabhāvānaṃ abhāvo. ‘‘Tānipi hi aparibyattakiccāniyevā’’ti ettha āvajjana dvayaṃ javanānaṃ purecārika kiccattā aparibyattakiccaṃ hotu. Hasituppādacittaṃ pana javanakiccattā kathaṃ aparibyattakiccaṃ bhaveyyāti. Tampi sabbaññutaññāṇādīnaṃ anucārikamattattā aparibyattakiccaṃ nāma hotīti. ‘‘Aṭṭhamahāvipākesu viya vattabbo’’ti mahāvipākānaṃ sasaṅkhārikā saṅkhārikabhāvo purimabhave maraṇāsannakāle ārammaṇānaṃ payogena saha vā vinā vā upaṭṭhānaṃ paṭicca vutto, tathā vattabboti adhippāyo.
38“由弱业所生的”这句话,是就结生、有分和死的作用来说的。“在弱所依、弱作用处”是指在眼等所依中,那些属于转向等弱作用、弱处所的心。“在那里”等话是在解释它的含义。其中,“与散乱相应”是指与具有散乱作用的掉举相应。“能持续一劫的”是指破僧伽的业。在六种所依色中,只有心所依处像金银一样是坚实的所依,其余的都像水晶一样,只是净色而不坚实,所以说“在眼等弱所依中”。而见等作用,因为是速行的前行,所以是小作用,因此说“在见等中”等等。
38. ‘‘Dubbala kammanibbattesū’’ti paṭisandhi bhavaṅga cutikiccāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dubbalavatthu kiccaṭṭhānesū’’ti cakkhādivatthukesu āvajjanādi dubbalakicca dubbalaṭṭhānikesu. ‘‘Tatthā’’tiādinā tadatthaṃ vivarati. Tattha ‘‘vikkhepayutta’’nti vikkhepakiccena uddhaccenayuttaṃ hutvā. ‘‘Kappaṭṭhitikaṃ’’ nāma saṅghabhedakammaṃ. Chasuvatthu rūpesu hadayavatthumeva suvaṇṇarajataṃ viya sāravatthu hoti. Itarāni phalikāniviya pasādamattattā asārāni hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhādīsu dubbalavatthūsū’’ti. Dassanādīni ca kiccāni javana kiccassa purecarattā khuddakiccāni honti. Tenāha ‘‘dassanādīsū’’tiādiṃ.
39在这里,《灯论》把“iccevaṃ”这个词当作“aṭṭhārasa”一词的修饰语,因此说“应当知道‘sabbathāpi’一词……”。但在《广释》中,则把它当作“sabbathāpi”一词的修饰语,因此说“以一切方式,也就是按善、不善、异熟、唯作的类别”。
39. Idha dīpaniyaṃ iccevanti padaṃ aṭṭhārasātipadassavisesananti katvā ‘‘sabbathāpīti padassa…pe… veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Vibhāvaniyaṃ pana taṃ sabbathāpīti padassa visesananti katvā ‘‘sabbathā pītikusalākusalavipākakiriyābhedenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
4040. 关于美心。即使没有明说,也能成立。譬如说“八种出世间心”时,虽然没有提到其余的世间心和有上心,它们也能成立,这就是意旨所在。“与己俱行”指被自己的恶业所伴随。“即使不愿”是说,即便有些人会像欲求无间地狱的相、味、事那样去欲求。然而,对无知的人来说,他们的欲求是不足为据的,这就是意旨。“为得祥瑞”中,祥瑞就是吉祥的状态,这是复合词的解析。而“吉祥”就是指具足祥瑞的人。
40. Sobhaṇacittesu. Avuttāpi siddhā hoti. Yathā aṭṭhacittāni lokuttarānīti ca vutte avuttepisijjhanti sesacittāni lokiyānīti ca sauttarānīti cāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Attasamaṅgīno’’ti attanā pāpakammena samannāgate. ‘‘Anicchante yevā’’ti sacepi avīcinimittassādavatthu viya keci icchantu. Ajānantānaṃ pana icchā appamāṇanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Sobhagga pattiyā’’ti ettha subhagassa bhāvo sobhagganti viggaho. Subhagassāti ca susirikassa.
41“如实”是指按照事物的真实本性。这里,如果说“知道”就是智,那么是不是每一智都如实知道呢?对此可以提出疑问。如果每一智都如实知道,那就会得出这样的结论:用智去思考的人不存在不知道的情况,也不存在错失这回事。反过来,如果每一智并非都如实知道,而是有些地方知道、有些地方不知道,那就会得出:在知道的地方,那个智才存在;在不知道的地方,那个智本身就不存在。对此的回答是:即使有人心想“我要用智来思考”而去思考,但在任何地方若没有如实的知,那么在那些地方就是与智不相应的心。另有与智相似之法以及心、寻、伺、见都存在。即使以这些来思考,他们也认为自己是在“以智思考”。“应施法与受施者圆满”是指应施法之物的圆满和受施者的圆满。“无嗔害世界往生性”中,无嗔害世界是指远离身苦和心苦的上方天界或梵天界。往生即upapatti。依结生而趣入之义。无嗔害世界的往生属于他,因此是无嗔害世界往生。其状态之义是这样构词。“烦恼远隔性”是指由定力或某种修行而镇伏烦恼,或由圣道而断除烦恼。
41. ‘‘Yāthāvato’’ti yathā sabhāvato. Ettha siyā jānātīti ñāṇanti vuttaṃ, kiṃ sabbaṃ ñāṇaṃ yāthāvato jānātīti. Kiñcettha. Yadi sabbaṃ ñāṇaṃ yāthāvato jānāti. Evaṃ sati, ñāṇena cintentānaṃ ajānanaṃ nāma natthi, virajjhanaṃ nāma natthīti āpajjati. Atha sabbaṃ ñāṇaṃ yāthāvato na jānāti, katthaci jānāti, katthaci na jānāti. Evañcasati, yattha jānāti, tattheva taṃ ñāṇaṃ hoti. Yattha na jānāti, tattha taṃ ñāṇameva na hotīti āpajjatīti. Vuccate . Ñāṇena cintessāmīti cintentānaṃpi yattha yattha yāthāvato jānanaṃ na hoti, tattha tattha ñāṇa vippayutta cittaṃ hoti. Ñāṇappaṭi rūpakā ca dhammā atthi cittañca vitakko ca, vicāro ca, diṭṭhi ca. Etehi cintentāpi ahaṃ ñāṇena cintemīti maññanti. ‘‘Deyya dhammapaṭiggāhaka sampattī’’ti deyyadhamma vatthu sampatti, paṭiggāhaka puggala sampatti. ‘‘Abyāpajjalokūpapattitā’’ti ettha abyāpajjaloko nāma kāyikadukkha cetasika dukkha rahito uparidevaloko vā brahmaloko vā. Upapajjanaṃ upapatti. Paṭisandhivasena upagamananti attho. Abyāpajjalokaṃ upapatti yassa so abyāpajja lokūpapatti. Tassa bhāvoti viggaho. ‘‘Kilesa dūratā’’ti samāpatti balena vā, aññatarappaṭipattiyā vā, vikkhambhita kilesatā vā, ariyamaggena samucchinna kilesatā vā.
这些心的生起方式,在《清净道论·蕴分别》里已经这样说过:当人依靠所施之物、接受布施者等方面的圆满,或者依靠其他能生起喜悦的原因,欢欣喜悦,以“布施是有果报的”这类正见为先导,不退缩犹豫,也不等别人鼓励,就自己去做布施等福德善行时,他的与喜悦俱行、与智相应、无行的心的生起。可是,当像上面所说的那样欢欣喜悦,以正见为先导,却因为放逸等原因而犹豫退缩,或者要由别人鼓励才去做时,他那一类心就是有行的。这里所说的“行”,指的是由自己或他人之力而起的先期努力。然而,当人由于看见亲戚、眷属的行为举止,生起熟悉感,像无知幼童般的比丘们看见后,忽然生起喜悦,随手把某些东西布施出去或作礼敬时,那时第三种心生起。然而,当亲戚们鼓励说“布施吧、礼敬吧”,他们才这样实行时,那时第四种心生起。然而,当由于所施之物、接受布施者等的不圆满,或者由于其他能生起喜悦的原因不存在,在四种分别中都缺乏喜悦时,那时其余四种舍俱心生起。
Tesaṃ uppatti vidhānaṃ visuddhi magge khandhaniddese evaṃ vuttaṃ. Yadāhi deyyadhamma paṭiggāhakādi sampattiṃ aññaṃ vā somanassahetuṃ āgamma haṭṭhatuṭṭho atthidinnantiādinayappavattaṃ sammādiṭṭhiṃ purekkhitvā asaṃsīdanto anussāhitoparehi dānādīni puññāni karoti, tadāssa somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇa sampayuttaṃ cittaṃ asaṅkhāraṃ hoti. Yadā pana vuttanayena haṭṭhatuṭṭho sammādiṭṭhiṃ purekkhitvā amutta cā gatādivasena saṃsīdamāno vā parehi vā ussāhito karoti, tadāssa tadeva cittaṃ sasaṅkhāraṃ hoti. Imasmiñhi atthe saṅkhāroti etaṃ attano vā paresaṃ vā vasena pavattassa pubbappayogassādhivacanaṃ. Yadā pana ñāti janassa paṭipatti dassanena jātaparicayābāladārakā bhikkhū disvā somanassa jātāsahasā kiñci deva hatthagataṃ dadanti vā vandanti vā, tadā tatīyaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati. Yadā pana dethavandathāti ñātīhi ussāhitā evaṃ paṭipajjanti, tadā catutthaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati. Yadā pana deyyadhamma paṭiggāhakādīnaṃ asampattiṃ aññesaṃ vā somanassahetūnaṃ abhāvaṃ āgamma catūsupi vikappesu somanassarahitā honti. Tadā sesāni cattāri upekkhāsahagatāni uppajjantīti.
4242. 这里“八”这个字是用来表示:这些心并不只是八种,而是还有更多、更多的。为了说明这个合集的意思,所以说了“因此”等话。在十种福行事中,见正直业是智的作用。那么,怎么用智不相应的心来做这个业呢?回答说:以智相应的心使见解正直之后,在这期间由于落入智之流的缘故,也用智不相应的心来做。应当知道,就像“一切众生是业的所有者”等说法,以及“佛陀是世尊、法是善说、僧是善行道”等说法一样。因此说了“这些八种心”等。其中,十种福行事名为:布施、持戒、修习、恭敬、服务、回向功德、随喜功德、闻法、说法、见正直业。由它们所增长、所增广。而这些又在六种所缘中生起。做三种业时,他们就用这八种来做。而这一切又有下品、中品、上品之分。因此,又依次以所缘等而增长。其中,“它们应当被安立”是连接。“纯净的”是指不与增上混合。“如是作意”是指这样作意。“同样,智不相应的二千一百六十种”是连接。“以远离观择的”是指远离观增上的。“如是增长的”是指一切由福行事等平等增长的。“以善巧”是指以名为善巧者。“于种种转向路”是指:在与智不相应路各别而成的转向相应之路。“因此”是指:由此观增上、由此亲依止智。即使如此,也不能成为可能,这是连接。
42. Aṭṭhapīti ettha pisaddena imāni cittāni na kevalaṃ aṭṭheva honti . Atha kho tato bahūnipi bahutarānipi hontīti imaṃ sampiṇḍanatthaṃ dīpetīti dassetuṃ ‘‘tenā’’tiādivuttaṃ. Dasasu puññakiriyāvatthūsu diṭṭhuju kammaṃ nāma ñāṇa kiccaṃ. Taṃ kathaṃ ñāṇa vippayutta cittehi karontīti. Vuccate. Ñāṇa sampayutta cittehi diṭṭhiṃ ujuṃkarontā tesaṃ antarantarā ñāṇasote patitavasena ñāṇavippayutta cittehipi karontiyeva. Sabbesattā kammassakātiādinā, buddho sobhagavā, svākkhāto so dhammo, suppaṭipanno so saṅgho, tiādinā cāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘imāni aṭṭha cittānī’’tiādiṃ. Tattha dasapuññakiriyavatthūni nāma ‘dānaṃ, sīlaṃ, bhāvanā, apacāyanaṃ, veyyāvaccaṃ, pattidānaṃ, pattānumodanaṃ, dhammassavanā, dhammadesanā, diṭṭhuju kammaṃ,. Tehi guṇitāni vaḍḍhitāni. Tāni ca aṭṭhachasu ārammaṇesu uppajjanti. Tīṇi ca kammāni karontā te heva aṭṭhahi karonti. Tāniyeva ca sabbāni atthi hīnāni, atthi majjhimāni, atthi paṇītāni. Tasmā puna anukkamena ārammaṇādīhi vaḍḍhanaṃ karoti. Tattha ‘‘tāni ṭhapetabbānī’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Suddhikānī’’ti adhipatīhi amissitāni. ‘‘Iti katvā’’ti iti manasi karitvā. Tathā ñāṇavippayuttāni dvesahassāni sataṃ saṭṭhi ca hontīti yojanā. ‘‘Vīmaṃsāvajjitehī’’ti vīmaṃsādhipati vajjitehi. ‘‘Tathāguṇitānī’’ti sabbāni puññakiriyādīhi samaṃ guṇitāni. ‘‘Kosallenā’’ti kosallasaṅkhātena. ‘‘Nānāvajjanavīthiya’’nti ñāṇavippayutta vīthīhi visuṃ bhūtāya āvajjanāya yutta vīthiyaṃ. ‘‘Tenevā’’ti vīmaṃsādhipatibhūtena teneva upanissayaññāṇena. Evaṃ santepi na sakkābhavitunti sambandho.
4343. 从词义来说,“以痛苦之义”就是以折磨之义。“以不利之义”就是与利益相违之义。“以不精巧之义”就是不柔软、不微细之义。“以不可意异熟之义”是说这些法有不可意的异熟,所以叫不可意异熟;它们具有不可意异熟的状态,就是不可意异熟之义。因此,以不可意异熟之义。“以与彼对立故”就是与贪等对立。这样显示了被称为同义词义的说词之义后,现在通过“可鄙的”等语来说明注释书中传来的词义。其中,“可鄙的”指应被厌恶的、应被呵责的。以同分断的方式摇动它们,以镇伏断的方式撼动它们,以正断断的方式摧毁它们。“以令微薄为义”就是以削减为义。“以作终结为义”就是以令到究竟为义。“又”等语是显示引导方式的说明。“以善巧所生之义”是大众部注释书的说法。其中,善的、贤智的状态是一种箭。是智。由彼所生、所生的善巧所生,有三种。
43. Vacanatthe ‘‘rujjanaṭṭhenā’’ti tudanaṭṭhena. ‘‘Ahitaṭṭhenā’’ti hitaviruddhaṭṭhena. ‘‘Anipuṇaṭṭhenā’’ti asaṇhā sukhumaṭṭhena. ‘‘Aniṭṭhavipākaṭṭhenā’’ti aniṭṭhaṃ vipākaṃ etesanti aniṭṭha vipākāni. Tesaṃ bhāvo aniṭṭha vipākaṭṭho. Tena aniṭṭha vipākaṭṭhena. ‘‘Tappaṭi pakkhattā’’ti rāgādīhi paṭipakkhattā. Evaṃ pariyāyattha saṅkhātaṃ abhidhānatthaṃ dassetvā idāni aṭṭhakathāsu āgataṃ vacanatthaṃ dasseti kucchitetiādinā. Tattha ‘‘kucchite’’ti jegucchitabbe, nindi tabbe vā. Cālenti tadaṅgappahānavasena, kampenti vikkhambhanappahānavasena, viddhaṃsenti samucchedappahānavasena. ‘‘Tanukaraṇaṭṭhenā’’ti sallikhanaṭṭhena. ‘‘Antakaraṇaṭṭhenā’’ti pariyosānakaraṇaṭṭhena. ‘‘Api cā’’tiādi dīpanīnayadassanaṃ. ‘‘Kosalla sambhūtaṭṭhenā’’ti mahāaṭṭhakathānayo. Tattha, kusalassa paṇḍitassa bhāvo ekāsallaṃ. Ñāṇaṃ. Tena sambhūtaṃ sañjātaṃ kosalla sambhūtaṃ tiviggaho.
44“以强力业”是指以三因的殊胜业。“以弱力业”是指以三因的劣业,或者以二因的善业。“某些阿阇梨所说”是就摩罗瓦比住者大达塔长老而说的。“由编纂者”是指尊者佛音长老。“以近置缘之力”是指以近处安立的缘力,也就是说仅以现在缘力。现前的是业等所缘,转起的是大异熟。“从非异熟的自性”是指从不异熟的自性,意思是说不生起异熟的自性。“在注释书中”是指在《法集论》的注释书中。“在这里”是指在大异熟心中。“以及如此不转起”是指亦由不以布施等方式而转起。
44. ‘‘Balavakammenā’’ti tihetu kukkaṭṭha kammena. ‘‘Dubbala kammenā’’ti tihetukomakena vā dvihetuka kusala kammena vā. ‘‘Kehici ācariyehī’’ti moravāpi vāsī mahādattattheraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Saṅgahakārenā’’ti bhaddanta buddhaghosattherena. ‘‘Sannihita paccayavasenā’’ti āsanne saṇṭhitapaccaya vasena. Paccuppanna paccayavasenevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upaṭṭhitāni kammādīni ārammaṇāni. Pavattāni mahāvipākāni. ‘‘Avipāka sabhāvato’’ti avipaccanasabhāvato. Avipākuppādanasabhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Aṭṭhakathāya’’nti dhammasaṅgaṇiṭṭhakathāyaṃ. ‘‘Idhā’’ti mahāvipākacitte. ‘‘Tathā appavattiyā cā’’ti dānādivasena appavattito ca.
4545. 在大唯作心里。“上面”是指在路心摄录中,那时对所缘的确定。“只是自然”是阿耨楼陀长老本人说的。“将会说”即将要宣说。“如其所应”是指漏尽者相续中生起的大唯作心,与阿拉汉相应。“说真实”这一限定语,是因为并没有需要遮止的意义,这是其意趣所在。“那”是指有因的取。“作为遮止的限定语”是为了遮止“无因异熟唯作心也存在”这一过失而作的限定。“正如看见砂砾、碎石,也看见鱼群,有站着的,也有游动的”这句话中,看见砂砾、碎石是站着的,看见鱼群则有站着的也有游动的,如此随其所宜而作连接。这里也是如此。
45. Mahākiriyacitte. ‘‘Uparī’’ti vīthisaṅgahe tadā rammaṇa niyame. ‘‘Sayamevā’’ti anuruddhatthereneva. ‘‘Vakkhatī’’ti vuccissati. ‘‘Yathāraha’’nti khīṇāsavasantāne uppannānaṃ mahākiriyānaṃ arahānurūpaṃ. Bhūtakathana visesanaṃ tena nivattetabbassa atthassa abhāvāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Taṃ’’ti sahetukaggahaṇaṃ. ‘‘Byavacchedakavisesana’’nti ahetuka vipākakiriya cittānañca sabbhāvātappasaṅgassa avacchedakaṃ visesanaṃ. ‘‘Yathā sakkhara kathalikaṃpi macchagumbaṃpi tiṭṭhantaṃpi carantaṃpi passatī’’ti vacane sakkhara kathalikaṃ tiṭṭhantaṃ, macchagumbaṃ tiṭṭhantaṃpi carantaṃpi passatīti evaṃ yathā lābha yojanā hoti. Tathā idha pīti.
46“此即是”指的是这种阐明的能力,连接起来就是“此即其力”。意思是这是有能力的状态。在有差别的说法中,这是与责难的关联。在构造偈中。“这些”是指美善的欲界心。“福、恶、作的差别”是依福、恶与作的差别。
46. ‘‘Yadida’’nti yā ayaṃ dīpana samatthatā, ‘‘idaṃ sāmatthiya’’nti yojanā. Ayaṃ samattha bhāvoti attho. Bhedavacane codanāyāti sambandho. Racanāgāthāyaṃ. ‘‘Etānī’’ti sobhaṇa kāmāvacara cittāni. ‘‘Puñña pāpa kriyābhedā’’ti puñña pāpa kriyabhedena.
4747. 哪些法是欲界法?从下面以无间地狱为界限,从上面以他化自在天为界限,因为圣典中是这样规定的,所以这里的“欲”字是连同它所在的欲地一起说的,因此说“在欲中,在欲地中”。“所属”是省略的句子成分。“以及唯作”中的“及”字是“而”的意思。“如是”就是“如此”的意思。由此被遮止,这是关联。“在这里”是指在心摄这个主题中。“它的”是指“一切”这个词的。“有”是指系属于根的相续中所摄的法聚。但在这里,“欲界法”这个词中的“欲”字,是连同大地、山等而说一切欲地,所以说“地的同义词”等。“根所系及根非所系的法聚”中,根所系的法聚是入于有情的相续,根非所系的法聚是入于大地、山等。其中,不被命根所系属、不随从的,就是根非所系。
47. Katame dhammā kāmāvacarā. Heṭṭhato avīcinirayaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito paranimmita vasavattideve anto karitvāti evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ niddiṭṭhattā idhakāmasaddena sahokāsākāmabhūmi vuccatīti āha ‘‘kāme kāmabhūmiya’’nti. Pariyāpannāti pāṭhaseso. ‘‘Kriyā cā’’ti ettha ca saddo pana saddattho. Iti saddo iccevaṃ saddattho. Etena paṭisiddhāti sambandho. ‘‘Idhā’’ti imasmiṃ cittasaṅgahe. ‘‘Tassā’’ti sabbathāsaddassa. Bhavo nāma indriya baddhasantānagato dhamma samūho vuccati. Idha pana kāmāvacarā dhammāti pade kāmasaddo. So ca pathavi pabbatādīhi saddhiṃ sabbaṃ kāmabhūmiṃ vadatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhūmipariyāyo cā’’tiādi. ‘‘Indriyānindriyabaddha dhamma samūho’’ti indriyabaddha dhamma samūho sattasantānāgato, anindriyabaddha dhamma samūho pathavi pabbatādi gato. Tattha jīvitindriyena anābaddho anāyatto anindriyabaddhoti.
48在色界心中。“以具足”指以五支具足,即五支合而为一、达到和合的状态。意思是:只有当五支合在一起、彼此和合时,安止才会生起;不和合就不会生起。而“和合”是指极其强而有力的和合状态。“以应修习”即应当证得。禅那有两种:所缘审虑禅和相审虑禅,所以说“对遍”等。但这里指的是所缘审虑禅。所谓“审虑”,是指以心接近遍相等所缘而审察、观察。禅那一词也有“烧”的意思,所以说“以及以烧敌对法故”。意思是像火烧柴一样烧尽烦恼。这里的意思是:一境性本身在达到安止的时候,具有极强的力量。但在初禅的前分阶段,则应当期望寻具有强而有力的状态。以“彼实”等来说明这个意思。彼实亦被称为一境性,这是文句的关联。它有单一的自性,所以是单一;它有单一的所缘,所以是单一所缘,即是一境性。它的状态,这是复合词解析。
48. Rūpāvacaracitte. ‘‘Samuditenā’’ti pañcaṅga samuditena. Pañcannaṃ aṅgānaṃ ekato sāmaggibhūtenāti attho. Pañcannañhi ekato sāmaggiyaṃ satiyeva appanā hoti, no asati. Sāmaggiyanti ca suṭṭhu balavatāya samaggabhāveti attho. ‘‘Paṭipajjitabbattā’’ti pattabbattā. Jhānaṃ duvidhaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānañca lakkhaṇū panijjhānañcāti āha ‘‘kasiṇādikassā’’tiādiṃ. Idha pana ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Upanijjhānanti ca kasiṇa nimittādikaṃ ārammaṇaṃ cetasā upagantvānijjhānaṃ olokanaṃ. Jhānasaddassajhāpanatthopi sambhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘paccanīka dhammānañca jhāpanato’’ti. Agginā viya kaṭṭhānaṃ kilesānaṃ dayhanatoti attho. Ekaggatā eva sātissaya yuttā appanāpattakāleti adhippāyo. Pubbabhāge pana pathamajjhāne vitakkassa balavabhāvo icchitabbo. ‘‘Sāhī’’tiādinā tadatthaṃ vivarati. Sāhi ekaggatāti ca vuccatīti sambandho. Eko attāsabhāvo assāti ekattaṃ. Ekattaṃ ārammaṇamassāti ekattā rammaṇā. Ekaggatā. Tassa bhāvoti viggaho.
“Agga”这个词有“顶点”的意思,也有“部分”的意思。“如是转起”是指心以专一的状态生起。“以增上功德结合”是指以增上性质的功德结合,也就是说,以根缘性质的功德结合。那专一性本身就是专一性,也称为定,应该这样连接。“定”这个词可以拆成“saṃ-ādhi”或“sama-ādhi”两种。其中“saṃ”这个前缀是“正确”的意思,而“sama”这个词则像“以法平等治理王国”等用法里那样,是名词性的词。为了显示这两种分别,所以说“那心本身……”等。那心本身——正确地安立,所以是定;那心本身——平等地安立,所以是定,这是两种分别。其中,“正确地”就是善妙地,“安立”就是安置,而安置就是放置,所以说“放置”。“平等地”就是不偏颇地。“即于彼处”就是指在那个所缘上。“由令昏沉与掉举不存在的导入”是指昏沉与掉举的不存在就是“昏沉掉举不存在”,令它发生、令它现前就是这个词的分解。种种心的散动就是“散乱”,不是散乱就是“不散乱”,这里指的就是这个。这样,在这两种意思里,专一性本身就具有殊胜,应该这样连接。但这样一来,专一性本身就应该称为禅那,而不是寻等。为了回应这个责难,所以说“寻等也……”。“api”这个词有总括的意思,“pana”这个词有另一方面的意思。对于那专一性,“它具有殊胜”是指与殊胜一起。“退缩”是指沉下去。“它”是指心。“游移”是指这样那样地摇摆不定。“厌烦”是指面向别处。这里说的是“欢喜”。“由此得到快乐”就是“得到快乐的”。“快乐”是指染着。“已增长”是指大大增长。“因为寂止的自性”是指因为寂静的自性。“如此受到摄受”是指以令心面向所缘等方式得到摄受。因为定是欲贪盖的直接对治,所以说“自己……乃至……遮止之后”。“不动摇而住”说的是安止的作用。
Aggasaddo koṭi attho. Koṭṭhāsaṭṭhovā. ‘‘Tathā pavattane’’ti cittassa ekaggabhāvena pavattiyaṃ. ‘‘Ādhippaccaguṇayogenā’’ti adhipatibhāvaguṇayogena. Indriyapaccayatāguṇayogenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāyeva ekaggatā ekaggatā, samādhī,ti ca vuccatīti sambandho. ‘‘Samādhī’’ti padassa-saṃ-ādhī-ti-vā, samaādhīti-vā, dvidhā padacchedo. Tattha saṃupasaggo sammāsaddattho. Samasaddo pana dhammena samena rajjaṃ kāretītiādīsu viya nāmikasaddoti dvidhā vikappaṃ dassento ‘‘sāyeva citta’’ntiādimāha. Sāyeva cittaṃ-sammā ca ādhiyatīti samādhi, sāyeva cittaṃ-samañca ādhiyatīti samādhīti dvidhā vikappo. Tattha sammā cāti sundarena. Ādhiyatīti ādahati. Ādahanañca ṭhapanamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhapetī’’ti. Samañcāti avisamañca. ‘‘Tatthevā’’ti tasmiṃ ārammaṇe eva. ‘‘Līnuddhaccābhāvā pādanenā’’ti līnassa ca uddhaccassa ca abhāvo līnuddhaccābhāvo. Tassa āpādanaṃ āpajjāpananti viggaho. Vividhena cittassa saṃharaṇaṃ visāhāro. Na visāhāro avisāhāro. Sāyeva ca niddiṭṭhā. Iti evaṃ imesu dvīsu atthesu ekaggatā eva sātissayayuttāti yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ pana sati, ekaggatā eva jhānanti vattabbā, na vitakkādayoti codanaṃ pariharanto ‘‘vitakkādayopanā’’tiādimāha. Apisaddo sampiṇḍanattho. Panasaddo pakkhantarattho. Tassā ekaggatāya. ‘‘Sā tissaya’’nti atissayena saha. ‘‘Osakkitu’’nti saṃsīdituṃ. ‘‘Naṃ’’ti cittaṃ. ‘‘Saṃsappitu’’nti evaṃ nu kho aññathānu khoti dvidhā cañcalituṃ. ‘‘Ukkaṇṭhitu’’nti aññābhimukhī bhavituṃ. Āramitunti vuttaṃ hoti. Laddhaṃ sātaṃ yenāti laddhassātaṃ. ‘‘Sātaṃ’’ti sārattaṃ. ‘‘Upabrūhitaṃ’’ti bhusaṃvaḍḍhitaṃ. ‘‘Santa sabhāvattā’’ti upasanta sabhāvattā. ‘‘Tathā anuggahitā’’ti ārammaṇābhimukhakaraṇādivasena anugga hitā . Samādhissa kāmacchandanīvaraṇappaṭipakkhattā ‘‘sayaṃ…pe… nīvāretvā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Niccalaṃṭhatvā’’ti appanākiccamāha.
像这样显示了审虑的含义之后,为了显示烧灼的含义,说了“于他们中……”等话。“他们之对立”是指那些禅支法的对立、对治。“于意中亦”是指在意门中也是如此。更何况在身门、语门中呢——这里“pi”字有这样的强调含义,“api”字也同样适用。“名为已被烧灼”是指已被禅支法之火所烧而名为已被烧灼。“即便如此,禅那的称谓仅在他们的集合中成立”此为连接。“以法之合会为要”是指在禅那处,以禅支法的合会状态为要;在道处,以道支法的合会状态为要;在菩提处,以觉支法的合会状态为要。
Evaṃ upanijjhānatthaṃ dassetvā jhāpanatthaṃ dassento ‘‘tesu cā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Tappaccanīkā’’ti tesaṃ jhānaṅga dhammānaṃ paccanīkā paṭipakkhā. ‘‘Manasmiṃ pī’’ti manodvārepi. Pageva kāyavacīdvāresūti evaṃ sambhāvanattho cettha pisaddo. Apisaddopi yujjati. ‘‘Jhāpitā nāma hontī’’ti jhānaṅga dhammaggīhi daḍḍhānāma honti. ‘‘Evaṃ santepi tesaṃ samudāye eva jhāna vohāro siddho’’ti yojanā. ‘‘Dhamma sāmaggipadhāna’’nti jhānaṭṭhāne jhānaṅga dhammānaṃ maggaṭṭhāne maggaṅga dhammānaṃ bodhiṭṭhāne bojjhaṅga dhammānaṃ samaggabhāvappadhānaṃ.
像这样,按照结集者的理解讲完禅那之后,现在为了按照其他人的理解来说明它,就说“其他人……”等。接着是“然而其他人说”这样的连接。其中,“如各自的作用”里,sassa idaṃ sakaṃ,即“这个是他自己的”。“自己的”就是自己的,“这个”就是所属的,意思是那些属于自己的东西。“iti”是“因此”的意思。“在《发趣论》中,达到禅那缘……就成就了”。那里确实这样说过。禅那缘,就是禅支对于与禅那相应的诸法以及彼等所起的诸色,以禅那缘为缘。道缘,就是道支对于与道相应的诸法以及彼等所起的诸色,以道缘为缘。“五聚等”:五聚、十聚。“初禅等得名亦然”:意思是初禅等得名亦然。“禅那状态”:禅那名称的获得。“无如是特定作用差别”:因为没有那样的所缘确定等特定作用的差别。
Evaṃ saṅgahakārānaṃ matiyā jhānaṃ vatvā idāni aparesānaṃ matiyā taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apare’’tiādimāha. Apare pana vadantīti sambandho. Tattha ‘‘yathā sakaṃkiccānī’’ti sassa idaṃ sakaṃ. Sassāti attano. Idanti santakaṃ. Yāniyāni attano santakānīti attho. ‘‘Itī’’ti tasmā. ‘‘Paṭṭhāne jhānapaccayaṃ patvā…pe… sādhentiyeva’’. Vuttañhi tattha. Jhānapaccayoti jhānaṅgānijhānasampayuttakānaṃ dhammānaṃ taṃ samuṭṭhānānañca rūpānaṃ jhānapaccayena paccayo. Maggapaccayoti maggaṅgāni maggasampayuttakānaṃ dhammānaṃ taṃ samuṭṭhānānañca rūpānaṃ maggapaccayena paccayoti. ‘‘Pañcasamuditādīnī’’ti pañcasamūha dasasamūhāni. ‘‘Pathamajjhānādibhāvassevacā’’ti pathamajjhānādi nāmalābhassevacāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Jhānabhāvassā’’ti jhānanāmalābhassa. ‘‘Tathāvidhakiccavisesābhāvā’’ti tathāvidhānaṃ ārammaṇābhiniropanādīnaṃ kicca visesānaṃ abhāvato.
49在这里,“于此可有”是指在这一点上可以有提问。“支的差别”是指初禅有五支、第二禅有四支等支的差别。“依个人的意乐”是指依个人欲求的差别。以上就是解答。“彼”指那个人。“hi”是表示广说的词。以寻为伴的,就叫有寻伴。“于寻厌离”是指寻粗重、住于近盖,这样见到寻的过患而厌离。与此人的意乐相应,这是连接关系。令寻离染、令寻离去、令寻超越,就是寻离染。寻离染并且那是一种修习,这是复合词。“于上上禅那的证得”是指获得越来越高的禅那。以意乐之力,不会变得像基础禅那那样,这是连接关系。心的誓愿得以成就,这是连接关系。“由清净故”是指由戒清净之故。
49. ‘‘Ettha siyā’’ti etasmiṃ ṭhāne pucchāsiyā. ‘‘Aṅga bhedo’’ti pathamajjhāne pañca aṅgāni, dutīyajjhāne cattāri aṅgānī tiādiko aṅgabhedo. ‘‘Puggalajjhāsayenā’’ti puggalassa icchāvisesena. Iti ayaṃ visajjanā. ‘‘So’’ti so puggalo. ‘‘Hī’’ti vitthāra jotako. Vitakko sahāyo yassāti vitakkasahāyo. ‘‘Vitakke nibbindatī’’ti oḷārikovatāyaṃ vitakko, nīvaraṇānaṃ āsanne ṭhitoti evaṃ vitakke ādīnavaṃ disvā nibbindati. Tassa ajjhāsayoti sambandho. Vitakkaṃ virājeti vigameti atikkamāpetīti vitakkavirāgo. Vitakkavirāgo ca so bhāvanā cāti samāso. ‘‘Uttaruttarajjhānādhigamane’’ti uttari uttarijhānappaṭilābhe. Ajjhāsaya balena pādakajjhānasadisaṃ na hotīti sambandho. Cetopaṇidhi ijjhatīti sambandho. ‘‘Visuddhattā’’ti sīlavisuddhattā.
5050. 对行的差别的审察。所谓“没有说行的差别”,意思是:没有用“初禅善心有一类是唯无行的、有一类是有行的”这样的方式来说明。“它”指行的差别。“由于已成立”,是说因为行的差别已经成立。怎么成立的呢?所以说“因为这样”等等。那些以乐为行道的人,就叫乐行道者。他们的状态就是乐行道性,这是词义解析。“他”指瑜伽行者。“最初”指开始时。“镇伏着”就是解脱着、在作分离。与“以苦镇伏”相连。通过“见欲的过患等”,就是见到欲像炭火坑一样、欲有很多苦很多恼、这里有种种过患等等,从而看见欲的过患。用“等”字,也包括看见寻等的过患。“就由那个”,就是指就由见欲的过患等。在这里,为了显示不应该按证智的差别来说行的差别,而应该只按行道的差别来说,所以说了“即使速证智的诸禅那”等等。其中,证知就是证智。那些证智快速、迅捷的,就叫速证智。那些证智迟缓、不迅捷的,就叫迟证智。这些就是禅那。“如果是这样”,意思是:如果行的差别这样按行道的差别而有。“在受用时”,指入等至的时候。所谓障碍,就是会造成阻隔的。“依已近住和未近住之力”,指依已安住在近处和未安住的力量。那些以纯粹的观为乘的,就叫纯粹观乘者。“纯粹”指不与止禅那相杂。“用刀杀害后”,指别人用刀杀害、砍斫。“猝然”就是极其迅速地。“对将死者所生起的”,意思是在临死的时候所生起的。因为不还者即使是纯粹观乘者,在定上也称为圆满修行者。如果他愿意,仅仅缘取某个相而作意,禅那也能成就。所以说“那也属于依道成就禅那的那一类”。“在色界梵天”,这是就八种等至在那里也是平常事而说的。而在无色界梵天,则只有一种等至是平常可得的。依受生而成就的诸禅那,在后有中依已近住之缘的差别而说有行的差别,这该怎么理解呢?所以说“即使在一有中……乃至……是合理的”。因为在一有中最初获得禅那的时候,行的差别与它相近,所以会有“在受用时也还是那同一个行的差别”这样的疑虑产生,为此而说了这个。由此显示:对于在后有中依受生而成就的诸禅那,依已近住之缘的差别来说行的差别,是根本不需要说的。现在,为了显示另一种说法——不依赖已近住之缘,也就是对那些依道成就的禅那和依受生成就的禅那来说,在道刹那、受生刹那成就的时候,禅那的生起本来就完全没有行道——所以说“或者因为禅那的生起离于行道”。这样,先依注释书成立了大禅那的行差别,现在为了显示它依巴利圣典也同样成立,所以开始说“再者”等等。这是指以苦行道为前分的迟证智和速证智两种定。“至此”,就是“以这个分量”,意思是以此分量。这里或许有疑问:为什么这里以“为什么这里不说行的差别”这样的说话次第而说它已成立呢?这是文句的连接。其余容易理解。
50. Saṅkhāra bhedavicāraṇāyaṃ. ‘‘Saṅkhāra bhedo na vutto’’ti pathamajjhāna kusala cittaṃ asaṅkhārikamekaṃ, sasaṅkhārikamekantiādinā na vuttoti adhippāyo. ‘‘So’’ti saṅkhāra bhedo. ‘‘Siddhattā’’ti saṅkhāra bhedassa siddhattā. Kathaṃ siddhoti āha ‘‘tathāhī’’tiādiṃ. Sukhā paṭipadā yesaṃ tāni sukhappaṭipadāni. Tesaṃ bhāvoti viggaho. ‘‘Yo’’ti yogīpuggalo. ‘‘Ādito’’tiādimhi. ‘‘Vikkhambhento’’ti vimocento viyogaṃ karonto. Dukkhena vikkhambhetīti sambandho. ‘‘Kāmādīnavadassanādinā’’ti aṅgārakāsū pamākāmābahudukkhābahupāyāsā, ādīnavo etthabhiyyotiādinā kāmesuādīnavaṃ disvā. Ādisaddena vitakkādīsu ādīnavadassanaṃ saṅgayhati. ‘‘Tenevā’’ti kāmādīnavadassanādinā eva. Ettha abhiññābhedena saṅkhāra bhedo na vattabbo, paṭipadā bhedeneva vattabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘khippābhiññajjhānānaṃpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha, abhijānanaṃ abhiññā. Khippāsīghā abhiññā yesaṃ tāni khippābhiññāni. Dandhā asīghā abhiññā yesaṃ tāni dandhābhiññāni. Jhānāni. ‘‘Yadi eva’’nti evaṃ paṭipadā bhedena saṅkhāra bhedo yadi siyāti attho. ‘‘Vaḷañjanakāle’’ti samāpatti samāpajjanakāle. Paṭibandhakā nāma antarāyikā. ‘‘Sannihitāsannihitavasenā’’ti āsanne saṇṭhitāsaṇṭhitavasena. Suddhaṃ vipassanāyānaṃ yesaṃ te suddhavipassanāyānikā. ‘‘Suddhaṃ’’ti samathajjhānena asammissaṃ. ‘‘Satthena hanitvā’’ti pare na satthena hananato chindanato. ‘‘Sahasā’’ti sīghatarena. ‘‘Marantānaṃ uppannaṃ’’ti maraṇāsannakāle uppannaṃti adhippāyo. Anāgāmino hi suddha vipassanāyānikāpi samānā samādhismiṃ paripūrakārino nāma honti. Icchante susati kiñci nimittaṃ ārabbhamanasikāra mattenapi jhānaṃ ijjhati. Tenāha ‘‘taṃpi maggasiddhagatika’’nti. ‘‘Rūpībrahmaloke’’ti idaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃpi tattha pākatikabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Arūpī brahmaloke pana ekā eva samāpatti pākatikāsambhavati. Upapattisiddhajjhānānaṃ bhavantare sannihita paccayabhedena saṅkhāra bhedo vutto, so kathaṃ paccetabboti āha ‘‘ekasmiṃ bhavepi…pe… yuttāni hontī’’ti. Ekasmiṃ bhavesabbappathamaṃ laddhakāle saṅkhāra bhedassa āsannattā vaḷañjanakālepi so eva saṅkhāra bhedo siyāti āsaṅkāsambhavato idaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena bhavantare upapatti siddhajjhānānaṃ sannihita paccayabhedena saṅkhārabhede vattabbameva natthīti dasseti. Idāni tāni magga siddhajjhāna upapatti siddhajjhānāni sannihitapaccayaṃ anapekkhitvā maggakkhaṇa upapattikkhaṇesu siddhakāle jhānuppatti paṭipadāya eva sabbaso abhāvaṃ gahetvā aparaṃ vikappaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘jhānuppatti paṭipadā rahitattā vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ mahaggatajhānānaṃ aṭṭhakathāvasena siddhaṃ saṅkhāra bhedaṃ vatvā idāni pāḷivasenāpi so siddho yevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Dukkhappaṭipadāpubbakānaṃ dvinnaṃ dandhābhiññakhippābhiññasamādhīnaṃ. ‘‘Ettāvatā’’ti etaṃ parimāṇaṃ assāti ettāvaṃ. Ettāvantena. Ettha siyā, kasmā idha saṅkhārabhedo na vuttotiādinā vacanakkamena siddho hotīti sambandho. Sesaṃ suviññeyyaṃ.
5151. 关于解析(vibhāvana)的段落。所谓“预备”(parikamma),是指“地、地,水、水”这样(重复所缘)的,以及“色是无常,色是苦,色是无我”这样(观照)的修习预备,这叫做“事”(adhikāra),也就是在前世已经修过的修行功夫。在前世时,为了求得禅那、道、果而做的布施、持戒等善业,也属于这个。在“这暂时还不适合”(idaṃ tāva nayujjatī)这句话里,“暂时”(tāva)这个词是用来表示还要看后面要说的话。也就是说,它暗示还有别的内容要讲。前先行造作(pubbābhisaṅkhāra)有两种:本性前先行造作(pakati pubbābhisaṅkhāro)和加行前先行造作(payogapubbābhisaṅkhāro)。其中,预备的前先行造作就叫本性前先行造作,这本身就是因缘聚。前面说过的前加行,就叫加行前先行造作。为了说明这里指的就是那个,所以说了“非”(na hi)等话。“乃至”(antamaso)是表示最终的界限。“一口食”(ālopabhikkhā)就是一口之食。这就是以预备为特征的前先行造作。诸禅都没有生起,这是连贯的意思。所以说“因此”(iti)。“它”(so)指修习造作(bhāvanābhisaṅkhāra)。“它们”(tesaṃ)指一切禅那。意思是说:世间禅那等……乃至……在坏劫时,这些众生修习禅那,以梵天界为归宿,这是确实存在的。“在前世寂静业中已作过事的人”,这是就前世已作过事的近依来说的。而在远世中,在寂静业方面没有作过事的人是不存在的。“正是如此”(evameva)就是像那样。在异熟禅那中,因为行的差别要依据前世业力来说,所以说了“在善与唯作禅那中”。“或者”等开始的,是后一种分别。这个分别是说:由前先行造作正生起者,它从来没有无行的状态,所以不说无行;也没有偏离,所以不说有行。这里,不说无行是连贯的意思。“由于无偏离”,是说因为无行性没有生起的余地。也不说有行。如果说的话,就成了没有意义的话。为什么?因为偏离不存在。如果偏离存在,那么修饰语才有意义,所以才那样说。智者不说没有意义的话。为什么?因为那不是智者的特征。如果偏离存在,就可以那样说。为什么?因为有意义。智者只说有意义的话。为什么?因为那是智者的特征,这就是意思。
51. Vibhāvanipāṭhe. Parikammaṃ nāma pathavī, pathavī, āpo, āpo-tiādikaṃ, rūpaṃ aniccaṃ, rūpaṃ dukkhaṃ, rūpaṃ anattā-tiādikañcabhāvanāparikammaṃ adhikāro nāma pubbabhavekatabhāvanākammaṃ. Pubbabhavejhānamaggaphalānipatthetvā kataṃ dānasīlādi puññakammañca. ‘‘Idaṃ tāvanayujjatī’’ti ettha tāvasaddo vattabbantarāpekkhane nipāto. Tena aparaṃpi vattabbaṃ atthīti dīpeti. Pubbābhisaṅkhāro duvidho pakati pubbābhisaṅkhāro, payogapubbābhisaṅkhāroti. Tattha parikamma pubbābhisaṅkhāro pakati pubbābhisaṅkhāro nāma, ayaṃ pakati paccayagaṇo eva. Pubbe vutto pubbappayogo payogapubbābhisaṅkhāro nāma . So eva idhādhippetoti dassetuṃ ‘‘nahī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Antamaso’’ti antima paricchedena. ‘‘Ālopabhikkhā’’ nāma ekā lopabhikkhā. So parikammasaṅkhātapubbābhisaṅkhāro. Jhānāni ca sabbāni uppannāni nāma natthīti sambandho. ‘‘Itī’’ti tasmā. ‘‘So’’ti bhāvanābhisaṅkhāro. ‘‘Tesaṃ’’ti sabbesaṃpi jhānānaṃ. Na hi lokiyajjhānāni nāma…pe… atthi, imesaṃ sattānaṃ sabbakappesupi kappavināsakāle jhānāni bhāvetvā brahmaloka parāyanatā sabbhāvāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Pubbe samathakammesu katādhikārassā’’ti āsannabhavekatādhikāraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dūrabhave pana samathakammesu akatādhikāro nāma koci natthīti. ‘‘Evamevā’’ti evaṃ eva. Vipākajjhānesu saṅkhāra bhedassa pubba kammavasena vattabbattā ‘‘kusala kriyajjhānesū’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Athavātiādiko pacchima vikappo nāma’’ athavā pubbābhisaṅkhāreneva uppajjamānassa nakadāci asaṅkhārikabhāvo sambhavatīti asaṅkhārikanti ca, byabhicārābhāvato sasaṅkhārikanti ca na vuttanti ayaṃ vikappo. Tattha asaṅkhārikanti ca na vuttanti sambandho. ‘‘Byabhicārā bhāvato’’ti asaṅkhārikabhāvena pasaṅgābhāvato. Sasaṅkhārikanti ca na vuttaṃ. Yadi vucceyya. Nirattha kamevataṃbhaveyya. Kasmā, sambhava byabhicārānaṃ abhāvato. Sambhave byabhicāre ca. Visesanaṃ sātthakaṃ siyāti hi vuttaṃ. Na ca niratthakavacanaṃ paṇḍitā vadanti. Kasmā, apaṇḍitalakkhaṇattā. Sati pana sambhave ca byabhicāre ca, tathā sakkā vattuṃ. Kasmā, sātthakattā. Sātthakameva paṇḍitā vadanti. Kasmā, paṇḍita lakkhaṇattāti adhippāyo.
5252. 关于行道与胜智的判定。“从相的生起”:是从似相的生起。再者,乐行道——使后来生起的迟钝或快速的禅那成为乐行道,这是句子的连接方式。“在前世”:是在近的前世。所谓障碍法,就是:烦恼障碍、业障碍、异熟障碍、施设违犯障碍、圣者毁骂障碍。其中,三种定型的邪见是烦恼障碍。五种无间业是业障碍。无因和二因结生的异熟是异熟障碍。比丘违犯了为安住于修行的人所制定的律制,没有作补救,这种违犯就是施设违犯障碍。若作了补救,则不成障碍。以种姓等辱骂、呵责圣者,未作补救的呵责,就是圣者毁骂障碍。在这里,若作了补救,也不成障碍。在其余三种中,则没有所谓的补救。这些法在此生中障碍禅那与道,所以名为障碍。解脱于它们,名为解脱于障碍法。“安住于善行道”:以戒清净等善行道的圆满而安住。“断除障碍”:断除住处障碍等十种障碍业而安住。“心志已发”:凡以人的力量、人的勇猛所能达到的,若未达到,精进便不会停止,如此持续的正勤精进具足。他确实是以此而被发出、被派遣、无所顾恋之身,因此名为心志已发。“不成就”:不存在。意思是:如果具足五精勤支。所谓五精勤支,就是具足信、不谄曲、无病、不懒惰精进、有智慧。
52. Paṭipadā abhiññāvavatthāne. ‘‘Nimittuppādato’’ti paṭibhāganimittassa uppādato. Sukhāpana paṭipadā, pacchādandhaṃ vā khippaṃ vā uppannaṃ jhānaṃ sukhappaṭipadaṃ nāma karotīti yojanā. ‘‘Pubbabhave’’ti āsanne pubbabhave. Antarāyikadhammā nāma ‘kilesantarāyiko ca, kammantarāyiko ca, vipākantarāyiko ca, paññatti vītikkamantarāyiko ca, ariyūpavādantarāyiko ca. Tattha tisso niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyokilesantarāyiko nāma. Pañcānantariya kammāni kammantarāyiko nāma. Ahetuka dvihetukappaṭisandhivipākā vipākantarāyiko nāma. Bhikkhu bhāveṭhitānaṃ vinaya paññattiṃ vītikkamitvā akatappaṭikammo vītikkamo paññattivītikkamantarāyiko nāma. Paṭikammepanakate antarāyiko na hoti. Ariyapuggalānaṃ jātiādīhi upavaditvā akkositvā akatappaṭikammaṃ akkosanaṃ ariyūpavādantarāyiko nāma. Idhapi paṭikamme kate antarāyiko na hoti. Sesesu tīsu paṭikammaṃ nāma natthi. Ime dhammā imasmiṃ bhave jhānamaggānaṃ antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā nāma. Tehi vimutto antarāyika dhamma vimutto nāma. ‘‘Kalyāṇappaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhito’’ti sīlavisuddhi ādikāya kalyāṇappaṭipattiyaṃ paripūraṇa vasena ṭhito. ‘‘Chinnapalibodho’’ti āvāsapalibodhādīni dasavidhāni palibodhakammāni chinditvā ṭhito. ‘‘Pahitatto’’ti, yantaṃ purisathāmena purisaparakkamena pattabbaṃ, na taṃ apatvā vīriyassa saṇṭhānaṃ bhavissatīti evaṃ pavattena sammappadhāna vīriyena samannāgato. So hi pahito pesito anapekkhito attabhāvo anenāti pahitattoti vuccati. ‘‘Nasampajjatīti natthi’’. Sace pañcapadhāniyaṅgasamannāgato hotīti adhippāyo. Pañcapadhāniyaṅgāni nāma saddhāsampannatā, asāṭheyyaṃ, ārogyaṃ, alīnavīriyatā, paññavantatā,ti.
5252. 关于异熟禅。“变得柔软”:因为修习的力量微弱,所以变得迟钝;因为迟钝,所以软弱。“在各种作用处”:就是在见、闻等处。“乃至在低劣的自身中”:就是在无因和二因的人当中。“亦生不相似”:三因殊胜的业也能产生无因的异熟等等,因此产生不相似的异熟。“唯在有分处”:这里“有分”一词也包含结生和死心之处。“唯与善相似”:初禅善心只产生初禅异熟,第二禅善心只产生第二禅异熟等等,产生只与善相似的异熟。“唯善……乃至……名为唯作禅”:意思是以无差别施设。即使有差别也作成无差别,此种施设用语即是无差别施设。
52. Vipākajjhāne. ‘‘Mudubhūtaṃ’’ti bhāvanā balaparittattāmandabhūtaṃ. Mandabhūtattā ca dubbalaṃ. ‘‘Nānā kiccaṭṭhānesu cā’’ti dassanasavanādīsu. ‘‘Hīnesupi attabhāvesū’’ti ahetuka dvihetukapuggalesupi. ‘‘Asadisaṃpī’’ti tihetukukkaṭṭhaṃpi kammaṃ ahetukavipākaṃpi janetītiādinā asadisaṃpi vipākaṃ janeti. ‘‘Bhavaṅgaṭṭhānesu yevā’’ti ettha bhavaṅga saddena paṭisandhiṭṭhāna cutiṭṭhānānipi saṅgayhanti. ‘‘Kusalasadisamevā’’ti pathamajjhānakusalaṃ pathamajjhāna vipākameva janeti, dutīyajjhāna kusalaṃ dutīyajjhāna vipākameva janetītiādinā kusala sadisameva vipākaṃ janeti. ‘‘Kusalameva…pe… kriyajjhānaṃ nāma hoti’’ abhedū pacārenāti adhippāyo. Bhedampi abhedaṃ katvā upacāro vohāro abhedū pacāro.
54在《摄颂》的注释中,诸禅那的差别就是禅那的差别。不过从义理上说,与诸禅那相应的差别被称为禅那的差别,所以说“以与诸禅那相应的差别”。应当结合“初禅心”等来理解。“那即是”指的是色界心本身。而在《显扬论》后面的摄颂中,看到“以禅支相应的差别,每一者作五种”之说,这里则说“以禅那的差别”,也就是以禅支相应的差别。即便如此,因为此处特别指的是禅那差别另作别指,所以又说“另有其他禅那的差别”等。
54. Saṅgahagāthā vaṇṇanāyaṃ. Jhānānaṃ bhedo jhānabhedo. Atthato pana jhānehi sampayogabhedo jhānabhedoti vutto hotīti āha ‘‘jhānehi sampayogabhedenā’’ti. Pathamajjhānikaṃ cittantiādinā yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Tamevā’’ti rūpāvacara mānasameva. Vibhāvaniyaṃ pana uparisaṅgahagāthāyaṃ jhānaṅga yogabhedena, katvekekantu pañcadhāti vacanaṃ disvā idha jhāna bhedenāti jhānaṅgehi sampayogabhedenāti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi idha jhānabhedassa visuṃ adhippetattā ‘‘aññohi jhānabhedo’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
5555. 无色心说明。“极”是指更加超胜。“从自性上”是指从胜义自性上。那里没有结缚,所以叫“无结”。无结的虚空,就是“无结虚空”。“限定虚空”是指门洞、窗洞等处的虚空,人们在那里取虚空遍相。破除遍相之后所得的虚空,叫“遍破除虚空”,也就是由破除遍而产生的。仅仅是色聚分界的虚空,是“色分界虚空”。“以无边的方式遍满”:即使只有四指宽,也通过修习作意而遍满,所以取名为“无边”。“诸天的安置处”是指有大神通的村落、城市中诸天接受供物的处所,人们按时在那里向家神献供。“供物”是指应当供养的物品。“在那”是指在遍破除虚空中。“那即是”是指那所缘本身。这与入善禅者,或以果禅而投生者,或以唯作禅住于现法乐者,应当这样结合。称为“无边”,正如依地遍而生的禅称为地遍一样。“在一处”是指在生起后,或在住立时,或在坏灭时。由于已经消失,所以叫“无边”。“在名为无边中”是指在名为“无边”的那个当中。“由于以‘无边’的修习而生起”:初无色识是由于以“无边”这样的前分修习而生起。“依自己遍满的方式”是指不观待前分修习,这是意旨所在。“依语法规则”是指在自身义上附加ya后缀,并删除na字母。“与巴利不合”是指与分别巴利不合。“遍满无边”是指以无边为无边而遍满。“初无色识的不存在”是指那不存在的假名施设而已。“不存在”是指没有。“此”是指第四无色禅的。或者在这些当中,“利慧者的想”是指敏锐之想的作用。“由于行残余的微细性而存在”:为了阐明这个意思,说了“在此处”等。“顶”是指头顶。“教说之量”是指像“国王来了”等语中那样,只是主要言说而已。所谓“那即是”是指初无色识本身。善的初无色识,对于凡夫和有学来说,是善的第二无色识的所缘。然而阿拉汉有三种。其中,有一种人证得初无色后到达阿拉汉果,不进入初无色定就生起第二无色。他的善的初无色,是唯作的第二无色的所缘。有一种人证得初无色后到达阿拉汉果,再入那初无色定后生起第二无色。有一种人证得第二无色后到达阿拉汉果。这两人的唯作的初无色识,是唯作的第二无色识的所缘。因此说“识名为”等。
55. Arūpacittadīpaniyaṃ. ‘‘Bhuso’’ti atirekataraṃ. ‘‘Sarūpato’’ti paramattha sabhāvato. Natthi jaṭā etthāti ajaṭo. Ajaṭo ākāsoti ajaṭākāso. ‘‘Paricchinnākāso’’ti dvāracchiddavātapānacchiddādiko ākāso, yattha ākāsa kasiṇa nimittaṃ uggaṇhanti. Kasiṇa nimittaṃ ugghāṭetvā laddho ākāso kasiṇugghāṭimākāso, kasiṇaṃ ugghāṭena nibbatto kasiṇugghāṭimoti katvā. Rūpakalāpānaṃ paricchedamattabhūto ākāso rūpaparicchedākāso. ‘‘Anantabhāvena pharīyatī’’ti caturaṅgulamattopiso ananta nāmaṃ katvā bhāvanāmanasikārena pharīyati. ‘‘Devānaṃ adhiṭṭhānavatthū’’ti mahiddhikānaṃ gāmanagara devānaṃ balippaṭiggahaṇaṭṭhānaṃ vuccati, yattha manussā samaye kula devatānaṃ baliṃ abhiharanti. ‘‘Baliṃ’’ti pūjanīya vatthu vuccati. ‘‘Tasmiṃ’’ti kasiṇugghāṭimākāse. ‘‘Tadevā’’ti taṃ ārammaṇameva. Kusalajjhānaṃ samāpannassavā, vipākajjhānena upapannassavā, kriyajjhānena diṭṭhadhamma sukha vihārissavā, tiyojetabbaṃ. Anantanti vuccati, yathāpathavīkasiṇe pavattanato jhānaṃ pathavīkasiṇanti vuccatīti. ‘‘Ekadese’’ti uppādevā ṭhitiyaṃ vā bhaṅgevā. Antarahitattā anantanti vuccati. ‘‘Ananta saññite’’ti ananta nāmake. ‘‘Anantanti bhāvanāya pavattattā’’ti idaṃ pathamā ruppaviññāṇaṃ anantanti evaṃ pubbabhāga bhāvanāya pavattattā. ‘‘Attano pharaṇākāra vasenā’’ti pubbabhāgabhāvanaṃ anapekkhitvāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Nirutti nayenā’’ti sakatthe yapaccayaṃ katvā nakārassalopena. ‘‘Pāḷiyā nasametī’’ti vibhaṅga pāḷiyānasameti. ‘‘Anantaṃ pharatī’’ti anantaṃ anantanti pharati. ‘‘Pathamā ruppaviññāṇābhāvo’’ti tassa abhāva paññattimattaṃ. ‘‘Nevatthī’’ti natthi. ‘‘Assā’’ti catutthā ruppajjhānassa. Athavātiādīsu ‘‘paṭusaññā kiccassā’’ti byattasaññā kiccassa. ‘‘Saṅkhārāvasesa sukhumabhāvena vijjamānattā’’ti imassa atthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘etthacā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Muddhabhūtaṃ’’ti matthakapattaṃ. ‘‘Desanāsīsamattaṃ’’ti rājā āgacchatītiādīsu viya padhāna kathāmattanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Tassevā’’ti pathamā ruppaviññāṇasseva. Kusalabhūtaṃ pathamā ruppaviññāṇaṃ puthujjanānañca sekkhānañca kusalabhūtassa dutīyāruppaviññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ hoti. Arahā pana tividho. Tattha, ekopathamā ruppeṭhatvā arahattaṃ patvā pathamāruppaṃ asamāpajjitvāva dutīyā ruppaṃ uppādeti. Tassa kusalabhūtaṃ pathamā ruppaṃ kriyabhūtassa dutīyā ruppassa ārammaṇaṃ. Ekopathamā ruppeṭhatvā arahattaṃ patvā puna tameva pathamā ruppaṃ samāpajjitvā dutīyā ruppaṃ uppādeti. Eko dutīyā ruppeṭhatvā arahattaṃ gacchati. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ kriyabhūtaṃ pathamā ruppaviññāṇaṃ kriyabhūtasseva dutīyāruppassa ārammaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘viññāṇaṃ nāmā’’tiādiṃ.
57在出世间心中。“水流”指水流的聚集。“从起源”指从生起之处。“如说”指在巴利文中怎样说。“即所谓”指那是哪一个。“此也”指这也是圣道。圣道只持续一个心刹那,那它怎么能一直流到无余依涅槃界呢?回答说“以威力的遍满方式”。巴利文中的恒河等是五条大河的名字。“趋向海”指朝向大海低斜。“低斜”指随顺流下。“倾向”指向下流。“对于烦恼”是“不来”这一表达中的宾语。巴利文中“瓶”指装满水的瓶。“倒置”指口朝下。“不回流”指不再吞入。“不返回”指不再回来、不再趣入,即圣弟子。“不退回”指不返回。对此义说“不回来”。这样,以巴利文证明者说明那不退还之后,现在要以理证说明,所以说“如又如何”等。“由于”指由于什么原因。“他们”指凡夫。“恶戒者”指无戒者。“疯狂者”指因胆汁而疯狂者。“散乱心者”指心被抛弃了自性、犹如被鬼魅附身而疯狂者。“恶慧者”指无慧者。“哑羊者”指因恶慧而口水流于口面的哑巴。“仅在那道上”指仅在八支圣道上。那圣道又有一道、二道、三道、四道,共有四种。“从最初流入”指在四道中最初流入第一道流。“证得”是所说的意思。“入流”指流入流。“正证得”指正获得。一切菩提分法以不退转之势而转起,称为流,这是关联。正觉称为四道中的智。上正觉即是彼岸,那些有上正觉为彼岸者,即以上正觉为彼岸。彼岸又指归依处。入流之说如何与道同所依呢?所以说“称为第一道的入流”等。“寻求”指寻觅。以“杀者行走”的词源方式,道得以成立,所以说“杀烦恼而行,故为道”。
57. Lokuttaracitte. ‘‘Jalappavāho’’ti udakadhārāsaṅghāṭo. ‘‘Pabhavato’’tiādipavattiṭṭhānato. ‘‘Yathāhā’’ti kathaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āha. ‘‘Seyyathida’’nti so katamo. ‘‘Ayaṃ pī’’ti ayaṃ ariyamaggopi. Ekacittakkhaṇiko ariyamaggo, kathaṃ yāva anupādisesa nibbānadhātuyāsavati sandatīti āha ‘‘ānubhāvappharaṇavasenā’’ti. Pāḷiyaṃ gaṅgādīni pañcannaṃ mahānadīnaṃ nāmāni. ‘‘Samudda ninnā’’ti mahāsamuddābhimukhaṃ ninnā namitā. ‘‘Poṇā’’ti anupatitā. ‘‘Pabbhārā’’ti adhovāhitā. ‘‘Kilesānaṃ’’ti anupagamane kammapadaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ghaṭo’’ti udaka puṇṇaghaṭo. ‘‘Nikujjo’’ti adhomukhaṃ ṭhapito. ‘‘Nopaccāva matī’’ti puna nogilati. ‘‘Na punetī’’ti na puna eti nupagacchati ariyasāvako. ‘‘Na paccetī’’ti na paṭi eti. Tadatthaṃ vadati ‘‘na paccāgacchatī’’ti. Evaṃ taṃ anivattagamanaṃ pāḷisādhakehi dīpetvā idāni yuttisādhakehi pakāsetuṃ ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Yato’’ti yaṃ kāraṇā. ‘‘Te’’ti puthujjanā. ‘‘Dussīlā’’ti nissīlā. ‘‘Ummattakā’’ti pittummattakā. ‘‘Khitta cittā’’ti chaṭṭitapakati cittāyakkhummattakā. ‘‘Duppaññā’’ti nippaññā. ‘‘Eḷamūgā’’ti duppaññatāya eva paggharitalāla mukha mūgā. ‘‘Tasmiṃ magge evā’’ti aṭṭhaṅgīke ariyamagge eva. So pana maggo pathama maggo, dutīya maggo, tatīya maggo, catuttha maggo,ti catubbidho hoti. ‘‘Ādito pajjanaṃ’’ti catūsu maggesu ādimhi pathama maggasotassa pajjanaṃ gamanaṃ. Paṭilābhoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Sotāpattiyā’’ti sotassa āpajjanena. ‘‘Adhigammamāno’’ti paṭilabbhamāno. Sabbe bodhipakkhiya dhammā anivatta gatiyā pavattamānā sototi vuccantīti sambandho. Sambodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ. Uparisambodhi eva parāyanaṃ yesaṃ te uparisambodhi parāyanā. Parāyananti ca paṭisaraṇaṃ. Kathaṃ sotāpatti vacanaṃ maggena samānādhikaraṇaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pathama magga saṅkhātāya sotāpattiyā’’tiādi. ‘‘Maggetī’’ti gavesati. Mārenta gamanoniruttinayena maggoti sijjhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘kilese mārento gacchatīti maggo’’ti.
58在斯陀含道中。“只来一次”的意思是:从那里去之后,再回到这里。“以戒”是指以本来性质。由于这些来到欲界,所以叫“欲界来者”,也就是烦恼。这是就它们的存在性、现存性来说的。巴利圣典中“某一个人的”是表示作者意义的属格。应当这样连接:“被某一个人所未断除的”。“同伴状态”就是朋友关系。说了“是来者”之后,又说明这个意思:“来了之后,成为这般”。以本性而来,所以是“来了”。“这样的状态”就是“这般”。来到这个欲有身之后,因此称为“来者”——应当这样连接。“这个意思”是指依结生而一次来到此世间等含义。“以烦恼和趣向之力”是指以烦恼和趣向之力前往欲界。被道的助伴——禅那所镇伏的烦恼,由道断除了它们的趣向。这叫做道之助伴禅那的威力。因此说“确实不”等。“从天界”这里也包含了梵天界。应当连接为:在后一种含义成立时。有来性的是“来了”。不来的是“没来”。“以此”是指以不来。“异义不可能成立”是指在两个“这般”一词中,一个指这个欲界世间,一个指这个人界世间,这样不同的含义不可能成立。巴利圣典中“有苦迫的”是指与称为心苦的心病之压迫俱行。因此说“那些人的嗔随眠”等。其中“那些人”指凡夫、入流者、斯陀含。应当连接为“被称为有苦迫的”。“后一句”指“来了之后,成为这般”这一句,入流者和斯陀含应以此义来看。“在两种斯陀含中”是指因为说了“来了之后,成为这般”,所以以此义在名为斯陀含的两种人——入流者和斯陀含中。“前者的”指入流者的。“不共不与他共”是指唯以与第二果位等不共的特性。就像住在梵天界的入流者没有极七返性一样,第二果位者也没有斯陀含性。因此说“初果位者和第二果位者也”等。“因此”等是获得功德之说。“如此作意”是指以这个理由。“依上下受生”是指从上来而下生,以及从下来而上生,如此依上下受生。“如此作意”等是第二种获得功德之说。“五者在此究竟”是指五种人在此欲界究竟,即达到无余依涅槃。“然而他”指斯陀含人。对于那些注释师传承的意义,在他们的义理中,这个斯陀含人只说为五种,不是第六种人——应当这样连接。为了显示对于那些以“此世间”为含义的人,在其义理中第六种也可以得到,所以说“大般涅槃……乃至……已来”。其中“以一次来义,已来”是指以一次来的含义,在斯陀含中就是已来者。应当连接为:一切知佛也像住于极七返性的初果位者一样。在这里,“极七返性”是指极七返的状态。这只是一个举例的说法。一切知佛也像住于一次来性的第二果位者一样。为什么?因为在那个刹那,不会转起那种本性——这是意旨。所有这六种人都应在此……见。以此,在《广释》中所说“在五种斯陀含中,只有第五种是此处所意指的”,那已被否定。为什么?如果只有第五种是此处斯陀含一词所意指的,那其余四种在哪里被意指呢?应当被问及。作为生起者。“唯依理趣而来”是指唯依理趣辗转而来。因此说“如同”等。“不相违”是指与理趣不相违。
58. Sakadāgāmi magge. ‘‘Sakiṃ āgacchatī’’ti itogantvā puna idha āgacchatīti attho. ‘‘Sīlenā’’ti pakatisabhāvena. Kāmalokaṃ āgacchanti etehīti kāmalokāgamanā. Kilesā. Tesaṃ sabbhāvena vijjamānabhāvena. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ekaccassa puggalassā’’ti kattu atthesāmivacanaṃ. Ekaccena puggalena appahīnā nīti sambandho . ‘‘Sahabyataṃ’’ti sahāyabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Āgāmīhotī’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ vadati ‘‘āgantvā itthatta’’nti. Āgacchati sīlenāti āgantvā. Itthaṃ bhāvo itthattaṃ. Imaṃ kāmattabhāvaṃ āgantvā, tasmā āgāmī nāma hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Ayañca attho’’ti paṭisandhivasena sakiṃ imaṃ lokaṃ āgacchatītiādiko attho. ‘‘Kilesa gativasenā’’ti kāmalokā gamana kilesa gativasena. Maggasahāyena jhānena vikkhambhitā kilesā maggena samucchinna gatikā honti. Ayaṃ maggasahāyojhānānubhāvo nāma. Tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Devalokato’’ti ettha brahmalokopi saṅgahito. Pacchimasmiṃ pana atthe satīti yojanā. Āgamanasīlo āgantvā. Na āgantvā anāgantvā. ‘‘Tenā’’ti anāgamanena. ‘‘Nānatthā sambhavato’’ti dvīsu itthattasaddesu ekasmiṃ imaṃ kāmāvacara lokanti ekasmiṃ imaṃ manussa lokanti evaṃ nānatthānaṃ asambhavato. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sabyā bajjho’’ti cetodukkha saṅkhātena cetasikarogā bādhena sahito. Tenāha ‘‘tehi paṭighānusayassā’’tiādiṃ. Tattha ‘‘te’’ti puthujjana sotāpanna sakadāgāmino. Sabyā bajjhānāmāti sambandho. ‘‘Pacchimassa vākyassā’’ti āgantvā itthattaṃ sotāpanna sakadāgāmino tena daṭṭhabbāti vākyassa. ‘‘Dvīsu sakadāgāmīsū’’ti āgantvā itthattanti vuttattā tena atthena sakadāgāmināmakesu dvīsu sotāpanna sakadāgāmīsu. ‘‘Purimassā’’ti sotāpannassa. ‘‘Anañña sādhāraṇe nevā’’ti dutīya phalaṭṭhādīhi asāmaññeneva. Brahmalokeṭhitānaṃ sotāpannānaṃ sattakkhattu parama tādibhāvo natthi viya dutīya phalaṭṭhānaṃ sakadāgāmi bhāvopi natthi. Tenāha ‘‘pathama dutīya phalaṭṭhāpī’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Tasmā’’tiādi laddhaguṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Iti katvā’’ti iminā kāraṇena. ‘‘Heṭṭhū parūpapattivasenā’’ti uparito āgantvā heṭṭhūpapatti ca, heṭṭhato āgantvā uparūpapatti cāti evaṃ heṭṭhūparūpapattivasena. ‘‘Evañca katvā’’tiādi dutīya laddha guṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Pañcannaṃ idha niṭṭhā’’ti pañcannaṃ puggalānaṃ idha kāmaloke niṭṭhā anupādisesa nibbānapattīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘So panā’’ti sakadāgāmi puggalo pana. Yesaṃ pana aṭṭhakathā cariyānaṃ attho, tesaṃ attheso sakadāgāmi puggalo pañcavidhova vutto, na chaṭṭho puggaloti yojanā. Yesaṃ pana imaṃ lokanti attho, tesaṃ atthe chaṭṭhopi labbhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘mahāparinibbāna…pe… āgato yevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘sakiṃ āgamanaṭṭhena āgato yevā’’ti sakiṃ āgamanaṭṭhena sakadāgāmīsu āgatoyeva. Sabbaññu buddhāpi pathama phalaṭṭha bhūtā sattakkhattu paramatāyaṃ saṇṭhitā viyāti yojanā. Ettha ca ‘‘sattakkhattuparamatāyaṃ’’ti sattakkhattu paramabhāve. Idañca nidassana vacanamattaṃ. Sabbaññu buddhāpi dutīya phalaṭṭhabhūtā sakiṃ āgamanappakatiyaṃ saṇṭhitāyeva honti. Kasmā, tasmiṃ khaṇe taṃ sabhāvānati vattanatoti adhippāyo. Sabbopi so chabbīdho puggalo idha…pe… daṭṭhabbo. Etena yaṃ vuttaṃ vibhāvaniyaṃ pañcasu sakadāgāmīsu pañcamakova idhādhippetoti. Taṃ paṭikkhittaṃ hoti. Kasmā, pañcamako eva idha sakadāgāmipade adhippetesati itare cattāro kattha adhippetā siyunti vattabbattā. Janakabhūto samāno. ‘‘Ñāyāgatā evā’’ti yuttito paramparāgatā eva. Tenāha ‘‘yathā’’tiādiṃ. ‘‘Aviruddho’’ti ñāyena aviruddho.
5959. 所谓“下分”,就是下面的部分,也就是欲界。因为能导向下分,所以叫“下分结”,也就是欲贪、嗔恚等结缚。“so”指不来者这个人。
59. Orambhāgo nāma heṭṭhābhāgo kāmaloko. Orambhāgāya saṃvattantīti orambhāgiyāni kāmarāga byāpāda saṃyojanādīni. ‘‘So’’ti anāgāmi puggalo.
60以戒等造作大果报,所以叫“大果报作者”。他们的这种状态就是“大果报作者性”。这是戒等功德。“arahati”是值得接受的意思。“arahato”是阿拉汉的(属格)。“nibbacanaṃ”是词源解释,也就是分解词句的说法。应当这样连接:“于纯净空性中,不如此说;于空性行道中,不如此说”等等。其中,“suddhika suññatāya”指纯净空性章节,“suññatappaṭipadāya”指空性行道章节。而“sacca satipaṭṭhāna vibhaṅgesu pana”指在谛分别和念处分别中,一切令心增长的内容,应当在巴利圣典和注释书的说法场合中审察了知。
60. Mahapphalaṃ karonti sīlenāti mahapphala kārino. Tesaṃ bhāvo ‘‘mahapphala kāritā’’. Sīlādi guṇo. ‘‘Arahatī’’ti paṭiggahituṃ arahati. ‘‘Arahato’’ti arahantassa. ‘‘Nibbacanaṃ’’ti nirutti. Viggaha vākyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Suddhikasuññatāya tathā na vacittāni, suññatappaṭipadāya tathā na vacittānītiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Tattha ‘‘suddhika suññatāyā’’ti suddhikasuññatavāre. ‘‘Suññatappaṭipadāyā’’ti suññatappaṭipadāvāre. ‘‘Sacca satipaṭṭhāna vibhaṅgesu panā’’ti sacca vibhaṅga satipaṭṭhāna vibhaṅgesu pana, sabbaṃ citta vaḍḍhanaṃ pāḷi aṭṭhakathāsu desanāvāre vicāretvā veditabbaṃ.
61关于果心:由入流道所证得的果,就是入流果。其中,“已获得”指已经得到。这是就八支的果而说“与它相应”。“辞”是指词义分解。
61. Phalacitte . Sotāpattiyā adhigataṃ phalaṃ sotāpatti phalaṃ. Tattha ‘‘adhigataṃ’’ti paṭiladdhaṃ. Aṭṭhaṅgīka phalaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tena sampayutta’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Niruttī’’ti viggaho.
62即使只是让它变弱都做不到,更别说彻底断除了。“那些”指诸根。“锐利的”指锐利的。“它”指第四道。“那些”指色贪、无色贪、慢、掉举、无明等。“其他的”指除了那十种结缚之外的无惭、无愧等,以及一切恶法。
62. Tanubhūtepi kātuṃ na sakkoti, kuto samucchindituṃ. ‘‘Tānī’’ti indriyāni. ‘‘Paṭū nī’’titikkhāni. ‘‘So’’ti catuttha maggo. ‘‘Tā cā’’ti rūparāga, arūparāga, māna, uddhacca, avijjādayo ca. ‘‘Aññe cā’’ti tehi dasahi saṃyojanehi aññe ahirikānottappādike, sabbepi pāpa dhamme ca.
63在考察唯作心时,问的是:没有被执取吗?回答是:因为没有。应当这样连接。“assā”指无上唯作心的。“niranusayasantānepī”指即使在已无随眠的阿拉汉相续中。“iti”只是语句的结束。“vuccate”是答被宣说。再者,不生起,就是无生。以无生为法、为自性者,就是无生法。它们的状态——这样分解。又,它产生果报——这样连接。怎样产生?说“kusala…pe… katvā”。其中,“katvā”是成就之后。即使作了,也这样连接。“koci”指某位不熟练的圣弟子。那时只有果心生起——这样连接。“paṭibāhituṃ asakkuṇeyyo”指其威力不可遮止,这是一个复合词。
63. Kiriya citta vicāraṇāyaṃ. Na gahitaṃ iti ayaṃ pucchā. Abhāvā iti ayaṃ visajjanātiādinā yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Assā’’ti kiriyānuttarassa. ‘‘Niranusayasantānepī’’ti anusaya rahite arahanta santānepi. ‘‘Itī’’ti vākya parisamāpanamattaṃ. ‘‘Vuccate’’ti visajjanā kathīyate. Puna anuppajjanaṃ anuppādo. Anuppādo dhammo sabhāvo yesaṃ te anuppāda dhammā. Tesaṃ bhāvoti viggaho. Vipākañca janetīti sambandho. Kathaṃ janetīti āha ‘‘kusala…pe… katvā’’ti. Tattha, ‘‘katvā’’ti sādhetvā. Sacepi kareyyāti yojanā. ‘‘Kocī’’ti abyatto koci ariyasāvako. Tadā phala cittameva pavatteyyāti sambandho. ‘‘Paṭibāhituṃ asakkuṇeyyo’’ti appaṭibāhiyo ānubhāvo assāti samāso.
64在“初、终、分”等语句中,“初”指十二种善心,“终”指二十种唯作心,“分”指色界所摄的心和无色界所摄的心。“以初地之证得”是指达到初地。《殊胜义论》中说:“意指沙门果。”但从义理上说,这是指法的殊胜,二者相关联。由道、果、涅槃所构成的法之殊胜,名为出世间地,这是连接方式。状态地就是直接义之地。为什么?因为具有状态之法是依其自性而获得的。其余的处所地不是直接义之地。为什么?因为与施设相混杂。“诸法依各自状态的差别而成立”,以此说明状态地才是主要的地。作为欲贪所缘的粗显行相,名为欲界性。作为有贪所缘的中等行相,名为色界性、无色界性。不为那些贪所缘的微细行相,名为出世间性。依下劣不善业而有下劣的恶趣地,依殊胜善业而有殊胜的善趣地。在那里,依种种不善业或种种善业的粗、细性,种种恶趣地和种种善趣地得以成立。为了说明这个道理,说了“复次”等话。
64. ‘‘Ādi anta padesve vā’’tiādimhi dvādasā kusalānīti ca, ante kriya cittāni vīsatīti ca padesu. Rūpe pariyā pannāni cittāni. Arūpe pariyā pannāni cittāni. ‘‘Pathamāya bhūmiyā pattiyā’’ti pathamabhūmiṃ pāpuṇituṃ. ‘‘Sāmañña phalaṃ adhippetanti vuttaṃ’’ aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ. Atthato pana dhamma visesoti sambandho. Magga phala nibbāna saṅkhāto dhamma viseso lokuttarabhūmi nāmāti yojanā. Avatthā bhūmi eva nippariyāyabhūmi. Kasmā, avatthā vantānaṃ dhammānaṃ sarūpato laddhattā. Itarā okāsabhūmi nippariyāya bhūmi na hoti. Kasmā, paññattiyā missakattā. ‘‘Dhammānaṃ taṃ taṃ avatthā visesavaseneva siddhā’’ti etena avatthā bhūmi eva padhāna bhūmīti dasseti. Kāmataṇhāya visayabhūto oḷārikākāro kāmāvacaratā nāma. Bhavataṇhāya visayabhūto majjhimākāro rūpārūpāvacaratā nāma. Tāsaṃ taṇhānaṃ avisayabhūto saṇha sukhumākāro lokuttaratā nāma. Hīnānaṃ akusala kammānaṃ vasena hīnā apāyabhūmiyo. Paṇītānaṃ kusala kammānaṃ vasena paṇītā sugati bhūmiyo. Tattha ca nānā akusala kammānaṃ vā nānā kusala kammānaṃ vā oḷārika sukhumatā vasena nānā duggati bhūmiyo nānā sugati bhūmiyo ca siddhā hontīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘api cā’’tiādimāha.
6565. 偈颂的前半部分说的是“此中,我的意有八十九种分别”这两句;后半部分说的是“或者说,智者分别一百二十一种”这两句。这跟这个说法对不上。怎么对不上呢?按照这个说法,是把整首偈颂当成一句话来理解:把八十九种分别的意,分成一百二十一种来分别。所谓“以与初禅相似之义”,就是与世间初禅相似之义。具备四支的,它本身就成立为第二禅。具备三支的,它本身就成立为第三禅。具备二支的,它本身就成立为第四禅。又具备二支的,它本身就成立为第五禅。《解明论》中说“如是说”,意思是依禅支来说,因为与初禅相似,所以称为初禅等等,就是这样说的。依寻等支的出现而分成五种,这是前后的关联。其余的世间禅,并不是因为有什么增上才可以称为禅。为什么呢?所以说“因为它们”等等。其中,“它们”指世间禅。“近行”就是接近。“烧”就是燃烧。这是依本性而成立的,不是依基础禅等而成立的。“作用”就是为了成就五支状态所应当做的事。“以彼缘差别”就是依基础禅等缘的差别。“于彼”就是于缘的差别。就像在世间禅中,某种近行修习叫做离寻修习……某种叫做离色修习。而对于无想有情之行者,则叫做离想修习。如此类推,这是结合。“彼”指近行修习。“或与舍俱”中,以“或”字,把没有说出来的“或超越色”“或超越想”作为选项。初修的时候是这样,但到了自在的时候又怎样呢?所以说“于诸禅”等等。说了“具有多种能力”之后,又以“某种”等等来显示多种能力。某种近行修习,为了“离寻”就是让寻离去。也就是说,要让自己的禅成为无寻,这是所说的意思。因此说“为超越”。那近行修习。其余的近行修习也是这样。
65. Gāthāya pubbaddhaṃ nāma-ittha mekūna navuti, ppabhedaṃ pana mānasanti pādadvayaṃ. Aparaddhaṃ nāma ekavīsasataṃvātha, vibhajanti vicakkhaṇāti pādadvayaṃ. Taṃ iminā na sameti. Kathaṃ na sameti. Iminā vacanena sakalampi gāthaṃ ekūna navutippabhedaṃ mānasaṃ ekavīsa sataṃ katvā vibhajantī-ti evaṃ ekavākyaṃ katvā yojanaṃ ñāpeti. ‘‘Pathamajjhāna sadisaṭṭhenā’’ti lokiya pathamajjhāna sadisaṭṭhena. Yaṃ caturaṅgīkaṃ, taṃ sayameva dutīyajjhānanti siddhaṃ. Yaṃ tiyaṅgīkaṃ, taṃ sayameva tatīyajjhānanti siddhaṃ. Yaṃ duvaṅgīkaṃ, taṃ sayameva catutthajjhānanti siddhaṃ. Yaṃ puna duvaṅgīkaṃ, taṃ sayameva pañcamajjhānanti siddhaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ vutta’’nti vibhāvaniyaṃ jhānaṅgavasena pathamajjhāna sadisattā pathamajjhānañcāti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Vitakkādi aṅgapātubhāvena pañcadhā vibhajantīti sambandho. Na itarāni lokiyajjhānāni sātissayato jhānāni nāma siyuṃ. Kasmāti āha ‘‘tāni hī’’tiādiṃ. Tattha ‘‘tānī’’ti lokiyajjhānāni. ‘‘Upeccā’’ti upagantvā. ‘‘Jhāpentī’’ti dahanti. Pakatiyā eva siddho hoti, na pādakajjhānādivasena siddho. ‘‘Kicca’’nti pañcaṅgīka bhāvatthāya kattabba kiccaṃ. ‘‘Tena paccaya visesenā’’ti pādakajjhānādinā paccaya visesena. ‘‘Tasmiṃ’’ti paccaya visese. Yathālokiyajjhānesu upacārabhūtā bhāvanā kāci vitakka virāga bhāvanā nāma hoti…pe… kāci rūpa virāga bhāvanā nāma. Asaññi gāmīnaṃ pana saññā virāga bhāvanā nāma hoti. Evamevanti yojanā. ‘‘Sā’’ti upacāra bhāvanā .‘‘Upekkhā sahagataṃ vā’’ti ettha vā saddena rūpasamatikkamaṃ vā saññā samatikkamaṃ vāti avuttaṃ vikappeti. Ādikammikakāle evaṃ hotu, vasibhūtakāle pana kathanti āha ‘‘jhānesū’’tiādiṃ. Nānāsattiyuttā hotīti vatvā nānāsattiyo dasseti ‘‘kācī’’tiādinā. Yā upacāra bhāvanā. ‘‘Vitakkaṃ virājetuṃ’’ti vitakkaṃ vigametuṃ. Attano jhānaṃ avitakkaṃ kātunti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘atikkāmetuṃ’’ti. Sā upacāra bhāvanā. Sesāsupi upacāra bhāvanāsu.
6666. (问:)「这是观」是指导向出起的观。有人说「观本来就是那样」,意思是:这并不是称为离贪的修习。「为了确定」意思是:为了确定,就像在说「就让它成为无寻的状态吧」。「意图」是指基础论师长老的意图。「被正观」是指:这个禅那以灭尽之义为无常,以怖畏之义为苦,以无坚实之义为无我,这样被正观、被随观。这与注释书不一致。因为那里说:从任何一种等至出起之后,对任何一种等至法进行正观,所生起的道,与那种等至是相似的。意思是:被正观的等至与道是相似的。在这里,「从任何一种等至出起之后」这句话说明了基础禅那。「在有基础禅那时」这句话表明,如果没有基础禅那,这种主张也不能成立。「观也……达到」这句话表明,在这种主张中,观的确定也是应当被认可的。因此说「如同在世间禅那中」等。虽然如此,这里……看起来像是说了不矛盾。怎么回事呢?从第五禅出起之后,对初禅等进行正观,所生起的道,根据第一位长老的主张是第五禅者,根据第二种主张则成为初禅等禅者,这两种主张是矛盾的。但根据第三种主张,在这里,无论希望什么,就成为那种禅者,那些主张就不矛盾,而且意欲是有意义的,这样就说是没有矛盾的。然而在这里,无论希望什么,就成为那种禅者。但如果没有希望,就恰恰是矛盾的。因此说「然而这些主张……为了避免矛盾」。在圣典中,「内心作意空」是指:对自身相续中的那个禅那以及与禅那俱行的五蕴,作意其为常、乐、我、命者的空。「不跳入」是指不进入。「应使之安止」是指应使之安定下来。「应使之专一」是指应使之朝向单一所缘。「应使之等持」是指应使之妥善安置。「依止」是指作为基础,这是意图。
66. (Ka) ‘‘sā vipassanā’’ti vuṭṭhānagāmini vipassanā. ‘‘Vipassanā pākatikā evā’’tikāci virāga bhāvanā nāma na hotīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Niyāmetuṃ’’ti avitakkameva hotūti vadamānā viya vavatthapetuṃ. ‘‘Adhippāyo’’ti pādakavādittherassa adhippāyo. ‘‘Sammasīyatī’’ti idaṃ jhānaṃ aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena, dukkhaṃ bhayaṭṭhena, anattā asārakaṭṭhenāti sammasīyati samanupassīyati. Taṃ aṭṭhakathāya na sameti. Vuttañhi tattha. Yato yato samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ye ye samāpatti dhamme sammasitvā maggo nibbattito hoti. Taṃ taṃ samāpatti sadisova hoti. Sammasitasamāpatti sadisoti atthoti. Ettha hi ‘‘yato yato samāpattito vuṭṭhāyā’’ti etena pādakajjhānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pādakajjhāne satī’’ti etena ayaṃ vādopi pādakajjhānena vinā nasijjhatīti dasseti. ‘‘Vipassanāpi…pe… pattā hotī’’ti etena imasmiṃ vādepi vipassanā niyāmo icchitabboti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘yathālokiyajjhānesū’’tiādiṃ. Kāmañcettha…pe… avirodho vutto viya dissati. Kathaṃ. Pañcamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya hi pathamajjhānādīni sammasato uppannamaggo pathamattheravādena pañcamajjhāniko, dutīya vādena pathamādijjhāniko āpajjatīti dvepi vādā virujjhanti. Tatīya vādena panettha yaṃ icchati, taṃ jhāniko hotīti te ca vādā na virujjhanti, ajjhāsayo ca sātthako hotīti evaṃ aviruddho vutto hotīti. Ettha pana yaṃ icchati, taṃ jhāniko hoti. Icchāya pana asati, virodhoyeva. Tenāha ‘‘ime pana vādā. …Pe… . Virodho pariharituṃ’’ti. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ajjhattaṃ suññataṃ manasi karotī’’ti ajjhattasantānetaṃ taṃ jhānañca jhānasahagatañca khandha pañcakaṃ nicca sukha atta jīvato suññataṃ manasi karoti. ‘‘Na pakkhandatī’’ti na pavisati. ‘‘Sannisādetabbaṃ’’ti sannisinnaṃ kātabbaṃ. ‘‘Ekodikātabbaṃ’’ti ekamukhaṃ kātabbaṃ. ‘‘Samādahātabbaṃ’’ti suṭṭhu ṭhapetabbaṃ. ‘‘Nissāyā’’ti pādakaṃ katvāti adhippāyo.
67在讨论审察中:前面说“近行修习”在更高的禅那里决定禅支。而下面则说“意欲”在更高的禅那里决定禅支。其中,“唯是意欲”这个“唯”字排除了基础禅那;“这里唯是近行修习”这个“唯”字排除了意欲。因为这两者同时存在时,近行修习才是主要的,而意欲则促成它种种不同的作用。“意欲的平等性确立”意思是:在道中,无论应该得到什么,就让它得到吧,我没有什么特别之处——这样就是意欲的平等性确立。“于彼”指意欲的特殊性。“彼”指意欲的特殊性。为什么合理呢?所以说“愿……所愿……而生起”。“于一切禅那已得自在者”这句话,同时关联“入定”和“生起”两个词。“正为观殊胜”就是正为趣向出起的观的殊胜。然而,因为在八种等至中,从每一种等至出起后,只是对那出起的等至法进行正观,而不是对其余的禅那进行正观,所以连接起来说:应当以基础禅那为标准。圣典语句中,“居士”是呼格。“唯是远离”就是远离之后,成为已远离、已离去之后。“具足而住”就是完全成就之后而住。“彼如是反思”就是如此省察。“已思惟的”就是完全聚集、安排好的。“住于彼”就是住于那初禅而不退失。“慈心解脱”就是称为慈禅那的心解脱,也就是心以不执著的方式运作。同样,悲心解脱、喜心解脱。“离所生”就是依身远离和心远离而生起。“喜乐”就是具备喜和乐。或者,离所生起的喜乐为“离所生喜乐”,中间有鼻音插入。色本身就是色聚,受本身就是受聚等等,这是复合词。而“已去”一词应当看作只是填补音节。“以那法贪、以那法欢喜”是显示观的倾向。同格中也有工具格的说法。关联是“成为化生者”。“于彼般涅槃者”是指在梵天界必定般涅槃,不退转。因此说“不退转法,从彼世界”。“以基础禅那为标准”意思是:基础禅那将决定道中的禅支,而不是被正观的禅那,这是意图。“不作基础”就是说不在近处入定。“无论希望什么禅那”是指在道中希望。
67. (Ka) vādavicāraṇāyaṃ. Upacāra bhāvanā eva uparijjhāne jhānaṅgaṃ niyāmetīti vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhā pana ajjhāsayo eva uparijjhāne jhānaṅgaṃ niyāmetīti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘ajjhāsayo evā’’ti eva saddena pādakajjhānaṃ nivatteti. ‘‘Idha upacāra bhāvanā evā’’ti eva saddena ajjhāsayaṃ nivatteti. Etesu hi dvīsu saha bhāvīsu upacāra bhāvanā eva padhānaṃ hoti. Ajjhāsayo pana tassa nānā sattiyogaṃ sādheti. ‘‘Ajjhāsaya sāmaññaṃ saṇṭhātī’’ti magge yaṃ laddhabbaṃ hoti, taṃ labbhatu, mayhaṃ viseso natthīti evaṃ ajjhāsaya sāmaññaṃ saṇṭhāti. ‘‘Tasmi’’nti ajjhāsaya visese. ‘‘So’’ti ajjhāsaya viseso. Kasmā yuttanti āha ‘‘icchi ticchita…pe… nibbattanaṃ’’ti. ‘‘Sabbajjhānesu ciṇṇavasibhūtānaṃ’’ti idaṃ samāpajjananti ca nibbattananti ca pada dvaye sambandha vacanaṃ. ‘‘Vipassanā visesatthāya evā’’ti vuṭṭhāna gāmini vipassanā visesatthāya eva. Yasmā pana aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu ekekāya samāpattiyā vuṭṭhāya vuṭṭhita samāpatti dhamma sammasanaṃ āgataṃ, na pana aññajjhāna sammasanaṃ. Tasmā pādakajjhānameva pamāṇanti yojanā. Pāḷipadesu ‘‘gahapatī’’ti ālapana vacanaṃ. ‘‘Viviccevā’’ti viviccitvā eva. Vivitto vigato hutvā eva. ‘‘Upasampajjā’’ti suṭṭhu sampāpuṇitvā. ‘‘Iti paṭisañcikkhatī’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhati. ‘‘Abhisañcetayita’’nti susaṃ sampiṇḍitaṃ, saṃvidahitaṃ. ‘‘Tattha ṭhito’’ti tasmiṃ pathamajjhāne aparihīno hutvā ṭhito. ‘‘Mettāceto vimuttī’’ti mettājhānasaṅkhātā cetovimutti, aññattha alagganavasena cittassa pavatti. Tathā karuṇā cetovimutti. Muditā cetovimutti. ‘‘Vivekaja’’nti kāyaviveka cittavivekānaṃ vasena jātaṃ. ‘‘Pīti sukhaṃ’’ti pītiyā ca sukhena ca sampannaṃ. Athavā, vivekehi jātāni pīti sukhāni assāti vivekajaṃ pīti sukhaṃ. Majjhe niggahitāgamo. Rūpameva rūpagataṃ, vedanā eva vedanā gatantiādinā samāso. Gatasaddo ca padapūraṇamatte daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Teneva dhamma rāgena tāyadhammanandiyā’’ti vipassanāni kantimāha. Sahatthe ca karaṇa vacanaṃ. Opapātiko hotīti sambandho. ‘‘Tattha parinibbāyī’’ti brahmaloke avassaṃ parinibbāya na dhammo. Tenāha ‘‘anāvatti dhammo tasmā lokā’’ti. ‘‘Pādakajjhānameva pamāṇa’’nti pādakajjhānameva maggejhānaṅgaṃ niyāmessati, na sammasitajjhānanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Pādakaṃ akatvā’’ti āsanne asamāpajjitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Yaṃ yaṃ jhānaṃ icchantī’’ti magge icchanti.
6666. 「如此种类」是指这样的方式,也就是针对刚出起的禅那而言。「为了区分心相续」的意思是:如果基础禅那是初禅,那么此后生起的心相续就倾向于寻,投入于寻;如果基础禅那是第二禅,那么此后生起的心相续就倾向于伺,投入于伺。就是以这类方式为始,依此类推来区分心相续。「在那里所说的」是指在《阐明疏》中所说的。
66. (Kha) ‘‘tathā vidho’’ti tathā pakāro. Āsanne vuṭṭhitasseva jhānassa. ‘‘Cittasantānaṃ visesetuṃ’’ti sace pādakajjhānaṃ pathamajjhānaṃ hoti, tato paraṃ pavattaṃ cittasantānaṃ vitakke ninnaṃ hoti, vitakke pakkhandati. Atha pādakajjhānaṃ dutīyajjhānaṃ hoti. Tato paraṃ pavattaṃ cittasantānaṃ vicāre ninnaṃ hoti, vicāre pakkhandatītiādinā nayena cittasantānaṃ visesetuṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ tattha vuttaṃ’’ tiyaṃ vibhāvaniyaṃ vuttaṃ.
受的思择。所谓“未成就”,就是没有成就。所谓“以别的方式”,就是用另一种方式。所谓“当被执取时”,这是句义上的连接。当说“依基础禅那等之力而成就”时,意思就是“当被执取时”。所谓“与任何一种受相应而成为”,就是与喜受相应而成为,或者与舍受相应而成为。所谓“由它们所确定的每一种道受”,意思是:在由基础禅那等所确定的道中,要么只与喜受结合,要么只与舍受结合。受是禅那的一支。所以,当道中禅支的确定性成立时,道中受的确定性也就成立了。然而,那些基础禅那等,在中间出起、导向观的过程中,并不确定任何东西。如果真是这样,那么与由基础禅那等所确定的道中每一种受相结合,就会有两种观受结合:也就是与道中喜受一起有两种观受结合,或者与道中舍受一起有两种观受结合。如果这样,同一速行路中的速行心就会有不同的受,这是不合理的。因此,道中受的确定性并不是由基础禅那等的确定性而成立,而是唯由观的确定性才成立,这是这里的意旨。然而,为了显示那些基础禅那等,在中间出起、导向观的过程中并非不确定任何东西,而是确实确定受,所以先说了“那也不合理”,然后又说“唯依基础禅那等之力”等话。所谓“六种依出离的舍”,第四禅的舍只有一种,因为它在六种所缘中舍断喜受而转起,所以名为六种依出离的舍。所谓“六种依出离的喜”,因为它在六种所缘中舍断六种依世俗的喜,而以一种中间禅那的喜受转起,所以名为六种依出离的喜。注释书中也这样说,这是关联。所谓“以及初禅等三禅”,是在四禅的分类中,以三种喜受禅那作为基础。所谓“又以纯粹行法为基础”,意思是以所缘的方式作为基础。这种依基础禅那等之力,在出起导向的观中以及道中,受的变化,在《法集论注》中也详细说过。所谓“有非人之乐”,因为超越了人们的世俗之乐而安住,所以名为非人之乐。所谓“正观正法者”,就是正确观见无常相之法的那位比丘,这是关联。
Vedanā vicāraṇāyaṃ. ‘‘Na siddho’’ti siddho na hoti. ‘‘Aññathā’’ti aññena pakārena. Gahite satīti yojanā. Pādakajjhānādīnaṃ vasena siddhoti gahite satīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Yāya kāya ci vedanāya yuttā hutvā’’ti somanassa vedanāya vāyuttā hutvā upekkhā vedanāya vā yuttā hutvā. ‘‘Tehi niyamitāya ekekāya magga vedanāyā’’ti pādakajjhānādīhi niyamitāya magge somanassa vedanāya eva vāsaddhiṃ ghaṭiyeyya magge upekkhā vedanāya eva vāti attho. Vedanā nāma ekaṃ jhānaṅgaṃ hoti. Tasmā maggejhānaṅga niyame siddhe magge vedanā niyamopi siddho. Tāni pana pādakajjhānādīni majjhe vuṭṭhāna gāmini vipassanāyaṃ nakiñciniyāmenti. Evañca sati, pādakajjhānādīhi niyamitāya magge ekekāya vedanāya saddhiṃ dve dve vipassanā vedanāyo ghaṭiyeyyuṃ. Magge somanassa vedanāya vā saddhiṃ dve vipassanā vedanāyo ghaṭiyeyyuṃ. Magge upekkhā vedanāya vā saddhiṃ dve vipassanā vedanāyo ghaṭiyeyyuṃti vuttaṃ hoti. Evañcasati ekavīthiyaṃ javanāni bhinna vedanāni siyuṃ. Tañca na yujjati. Tasmā magge vedanā niyamo pādakajjhānādi niyamena siddho na hoti, vipassanā niyameneva siddhoti adhippāyo. Tāni pana pādakajjhānādīni majjhe vuṭṭhāna gāmini vipassanāyaṃ na kiñci na niyāmenti. Vedanaṃ niyāmenti yevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃpi na yujjatī’’ti vatvā ‘‘pādakajjhānādīnaṃ vasenevā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Cha nekkhammassitā upekkhā’’ti ekāva catutthajjhānu pekkhā chasu ārammaṇesu somanassāni pajahitvā pavattattā cha nekkhammassitā upekkhā nāma hoti. ‘‘Cha nekkhammassitāni somanassānī’’ti ekaṃ vapathamajjhāna somanassaṃ chasu ārammaṇesu cha gehassitāni pajahitvā pavattattā cha nekkhammassitāni somanassāni nāma honti. Aṭṭhakathāyañca vuttanti sambandho. ‘‘Pathamādīni ca tīṇi jhānānī’’ti catukkanaye tīṇi somanassa jhānāni pādakāni katvā. ‘‘Suddhasaṅkhāre ca pādakekatvā’’ti ārammaṇa bhāvena pādakekatvāti adhippāyo. Ayañca pādakajjhānādīnaṃ vasena vuṭṭhāna gāmini vipassanāyañca magge ca vedanā pariṇāmo aṭṭhasāliniyaṃpi vitthārato vutto. ‘‘Amānusī ratī hotī’’ti manussānaṃ gehassitaratiṃ atikkamma ṭhitattā amānusī nāma rati hoti. ‘‘Sammadhammaṃ vipassato’’ti sammā anicca lakkhaṇa dhammaṃ passantassa bhikkhunoti sambandho.
6767. 关于“依禅支与结合方式的差别”这一说法,这里其实是指禅那结合方式的差别。“五种禅那的部分”则是按五法的方式来说的。因为这里要说明的是心的差别,所以即使说“禅那的差别”或“禅那”,也应当理解为就是指心。
67. (Kha) ‘‘jhānaṅgayogabhedenā’’ti vuttaṃ, jhānayogabhedo pana adhippeto. ‘‘Pañca vidhejhāna koṭṭhāse’’ti pañcaka nayavasena vuttaṃ. Idha citta bhedassa adhippetattā jhānabhedeti ca jhānanti ca vuttepi cittameva adhippetanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在偈颂的句法连接中,或者说“还有其他的连接方式被说到”,意思是:就像色界心和最高心按照初禅等的区别被把握那样,无色界心也在第五禅中被把握,这样就又说到了其他的连接方式。“因为被诵出”,就是因为被发音诵出。在最后一首偈颂的注释中,“如同”是指以哪种方式;“那摄”是指一百二十一心的摄集;“觉者”是指了知的人。至于“āhā”和“āhū”,声论师们认为即使在现在时态中也可以使用,所以说“他们说或谈论”。而说“诸智者分别”这句话,是为了表明此前“如此以八十九……诸智者分别”这首偈颂是总结语。
Gāthāyojanāsu. ‘‘Aparāpi yojanā vuttā’’ti athavā rūpāvacaraṃ cittaṃ anuttarañca pathamādijjhāna bhedena yathā gayhati, tathā āruppañcāpi pañcamejhāne gayhatīti evaṃ aparāpi yojanā vuttā. ‘‘Paṭhitattā’’ti uccāritattā. Antimagāthā vaṇṇanāyaṃ. ‘‘Yathā’’ti yena pakārena. ‘‘Taṃ saṅgahaṃ’’ti eka vīsasatasaṅgahaṃ . Bujjhantīti budhā. ‘‘Āhā’’ti ca ‘‘āhū’’ti ca vattamānakālepi icchanti saddavidūti vuttaṃ ‘‘kathenti vā’’ti. Idañca vacanaṃ pubbe ‘‘itthamekūna navuti…pe… vibhajanti vicakkhaṇā’’ti gāthāya nigamananti ñāpanatthaṃ ‘‘vibhajanti vicakkhaṇā’’ti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.